You are on page 1of 288

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

NOTICE
The material contained in this training manual is based on
information obtained from the aircraft manufacturer’s Pilot
Manuals and Maintenance Manuals. It is to be used for
familiarization and training purposes only.

At the time of printing it contained then-current information. In the


event of conflict between data provided herein and that in
publications issued by the manufacturer or the FAA, that of the
manufacturer or the FAA shall take precedence.

We at FlightSafety want you to have the best training possible. We


welcome any suggestions you might have for improving this
manual or any other aspect of our training program.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


Courses for the Bell 412 aircraft are taught at the following FlightSafety
learning center:

DFW Learning Center


3201 East Airfield Drive
DFW Airport, TX 75261
972-534-3200
866-486-8733
Fax: 972-534-3199

Copyright © 2012 FlightSafety International, Inc.


Unauthorized reproduction or distribution is prohibited.
All rights reserved.
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Dates of issue for original and changed pages are:

Second Edition .... rev. 0.1 December 2012

THIS PUBLICATION CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING:

Page *Revision Page *Revision


No. No. No. No.
Cover ..................................... 0.1 EP-17—EP-30 .......................... 0
i–viii........................................ 0.1 EP-31—EP-32 ....................... 0.1
EC-i .......................................... 0 EP-33—EP-47 .......................... 0
EC-1—EC-26 ........................... 0 LIM-i—LIM-iii............................ 0
NP-i .......................................... 0 LIM-1—LIM-27 ......................... 0
NP-1—NP-20 ........................... 0 WB-i—WB-iii ............................ 0
NP-21 .................................... 0.1 WB-1—WB-20 ......................... 0
NP-22—NP-35 ......................... 0 PER-i—PER-iii .......................... 0
EP-i—EP-iii............................ 0.1 PER-1—PER-35 ....................... 0
EP-1—EP-9 .............................. 0 CRM-i—CRM-iii ....................... 0
EP-10..................................... 0.1 CRM-1—CRM-6....................... 0
EP-11—EP-13 .......................... 0 SRE-i—SRE-iii .......................... 0
EP-14..................................... 0.1 SRE-1—SRE-46 ....................... 0
EP-15........................................ 0 MW-i...................................... 0.1
EP-16..................................... 0.1 MW-1—MW-8 ....................... 0.1

*Zero in this column indicates an original page.


CONTENTS
EXPANDED CHECKLIST

Normal Procedures

Emergency Procedures

LIMITATIONS

WEIGHT AND BALANCE

PERFORMANCE

CREW RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

SYSTEMS REVIEW

MASTER WARNING SYSTEMS


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

EXPANDED CHECKLIST
CONTENTS
Page
GENERAL INFORMATION ....................................................... EC-1
Introduction ............................................................................... EC-1
Operating Limitations .............................................................. EC-1
Flight Planning .......................................................................... EC-1
Preflight Check ......................................................................... EC-2
PREFLIGHT GENERAL—NORMAL PROCEDURES .......... EC-4
Before Exterior check .............................................................. EC-4
Exterior Check .......................................................................... EC-7
Interior Check ......................................................................... EC-25

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EC-i


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

EXPANDED CHECKLISTS
GENERAL INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION
This section contains instructions and procedures for operating the helicopter
from the planning stage, through actual flight conditions, to securing the he-
licopter after landing.

Normal and standard conditions are assumed in these procedures. Pertinent


data in other sections is referenced when applicable.

The instructions and procedures contained herein are written for the purpose
of standardization and are not applicable to all situations.

OPERATING LIMITATIONS
The minimum and maximum limits, and the normal and cautionary operat-
ing ranges for the helicopter and its subsystems are indicated by instrument
markings and placards.

Anytime an operating limitation is exceeded, an appropriate entry shall be made


in the helicopter logbook. The entry shall state which limit was exceeded,
the duration of time, the extreme value attained, and any additional information
essential in determining the maintenance action required.

These instrument markings and placards represent careful aerodynamic cal-


culations that are substantiated by flight test data.

Refer to Limitations and Specif ications chapter for a detailed explanation of


each operating limitation.

FLIGHT PLANNING
Each flight should be planned adequately to ensure safe operations and to pro-
vide the pilot with the data to be used during flight.

Essential weight and balance, and performance information should be com-


piled as follows:

• Check type of flight to be performed and destination.

• Select appropriate performance charts (see Performance chapter).

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EC-1


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Takeoff and Landing Data


Refer to the RFM Limitations chapter for Takeoff and Landing Weight Limits,
and to the Performance chapter for Takeoff and Landing Distance Information.

Weight and Balance


Determine proper weight and balance of the helicopter as follows:

• Consult the “Weight and Balance” section of the Rotocraft Flight


Manual for instructions (see Weight and Balance chapter of this manual).

• Compute takeoff and anticipated landing gross weight, check helicopter


(CG) locations, and ascertain weight of fuel, oil, payload, etc.

• Check that loading limitations listed in the Limitations chapter have


not been exceeded.

PREFLIGHT CHECK
The pilot is responsible for determining whether the helicopter is in condi-
tion for safe flight.

NOTE
The pilot walkaround and interior checks are outlined
in the following procedures. The preflight check is
not intended to be a detailed mechanical inspection, but
simply a guide to help the pilot check the condition of
the helicopter. It may be made as comprehensive as con-
ditions warrant at the discretion of the pilot.

All areas checked shall include a visual check for ev-


idence of corrosion, particularly when helicopter is
flown near or over salt water or in areas of high
industrial emissions.

EC-2 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Preflight Check Sequence

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EC-3


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

PREFLIGHT GENERAL—NORMAL PROCEDURES


BEFORE EXTERIOR CHECK
1. Flight Planning .................................................................... COMPLETED

2. Gross Weight and CG ............................................................... COMPUTE

Refer to the Weight and Balance section in the Rotocraft Flight Manual.

3. Publications .............................................................................. CHECKED

4. Portable Fire Extinguishers ................................................... CONDITION


AND SECURITY

5. Aft Fuel Sumps - Drain samples as follows:

a. FUEL TRANS Switches................................................................. OFF

b. BOOST PUMP Switches ................................................................ OFF

c. ENGINE 1 and ENGINE 2 FUEL Switches .................................. OFF

EC-4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

d. BAT BUS 1 Switch........................................................................... ON

e. Aft Fuel Sump Drain Buttons (left and right) ....................... DEPRESS

NOTE
If aft sumps fail to drain, the sump valves may be operated manually.

6. Forward and middle fuel sumps - Drain samples as follows.

Press-to-Drain Valves ...................................................................... PRESS

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EC-5


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

7. Fuel Filters - Drain before first flight of day, as follows:

a. BOOST PUMP Switches.................................................................. ON

b. ENGINE 1 and ENGINE 2 FUEL Switches .................................... ON

c. Fuel Filter (left and right) ....................................... DRAIN SAMPLES

d. ENGINE 1 and ENGINE 2 FUEL Switches .................................. OFF

e. BOOST PUMP Switches ................................................................ OFF

f. BAT BUS 1 Switch ......................................................................... OFF

8. Main and tail rotor blade tie down...........................REMOVE AND STOW

9. Pitot tube cover(s)....................................................REMOVE AND STOW

10. No. 1 and 2 engine air intake covers .......................REMOVE AND STOW

EC-6 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

EXTERIOR CHECK

WARNING

IF HELICOPTER HAS BEEN EXPOSED TO SNOW


OR ICING CONDITIONS, SNOW AND ICE SHALL
BE REMOVED PRIOR TO FLIGHT.

Fuselage—Front
1. Cabin Nose ............................................................................ CONDITION

All glass clean; wipers stowed.

2. Remote Hydraulic Filter Bypass Indicator ................. VERIFY NORMAL

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EC-7


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

3. Circuit Breakers....................................................................... CHECK (IN)

Transmission Chip
Detector Indicators ........................................................................ CHECK

4. Pitot Tube(s)......................................................... COVER(S) REMOVED;


UNOBSTRUCTED

EC-8 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

5. Static Ports (left and right)........................................... UNOBSTRUCTED

6. Rotor Blade (forward) ................... CONDITIONS AND CLEANLINESS

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EC-9


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

7. Cabin Nose Ventilators ................................................ UNOBSTRUCTED

8. Nose Compartment ...................................................................... SECURE

9. Battery Vent and Drain Tubes...................................... UNOBSTRUCTED

10. Searchlight and Landing Light ................................................... STOWED

EC-10 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

11. Antennas ...................................................................... CONDITION AND


SECURITY

Fuselage—Cabin left side


1. Copilot Door......................................... CONDITION AND OPERATION

Glass clean. Check security of emergency release handles.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EC-11


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

2. Position Lights....................................................................... CONDITION

3. Passenger Door..................................... CONDITION AND OPERATION

Glass clean. Condition of pop-out windows.

4. Landing Gear......................................................................... CONDITION


Handling wheels removed.

5. Passenger Step (if installed) .................... CONDITION AND SECURITY

EC-12 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Fuselage—Aft left side


1. No. 1 Engine Compartment ........................................................... CHECK
2. No. 1 Engine Oil Level............................ VERIFY ACTUAL PRESENCE
OF OIL IN SIGHT GAGE
Visually check oil level and filler cap
3. N2 Governor Spring ................................................ CHECK CONDITION

4. Engine Fire Extinguisher .............. CHECK BOTTLE PRESSURE GAGE


AND TEMPERATURE RANGE

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EC-13


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

5. Combining Gearbox Filter.............................................. CHECK BYPASS


INDICATOR RETRACTED

6. Oil Cooler Blower........................................................ UNOBSTRUCTED

7. Avionics Compartment .......................... SECURITY OF COMPONENTS


a. Check OVER TRQ warning flag (cat’s eye) for indication of over
torque.

b. AFCS Computers ................................................................. SECURED

c. Compartment Door .............................................................. SECURED

8. Access Doors and Engine Cowling ........................................... SECURED

EC-14 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

9. Rotor Blade (left)............................. CONDITION AND CLEANLINESS

10. Drain Lines ........................................................................... CLEAN AND


UNOBSTRUCTED

12. Engine Exhaust Ejectors......................................... COVERS REMOVED;


UNOBSTRUCTED

13. Oil Coolers................................................................... UNOBSTRUCTED

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EC-15


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Tailboom
1. Tailboom............................................................... CONDITION; ACCESS
COVERS SECURED

2. Tail Rotor Driveshaft Covers..................................................... SECURED

CAUTION
Do not bend elevator trailing edge tab.

3. Elevator........................................................................ CONDITION AND


SECURITY
Check for spring condition by moving elevator toward the leading edge
down position.

EC-16 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

4. Tail Rotor (90°) Gearbox................... VERIFY ACTUAL PRESENCE OF


OIL IN SIGHT GAGE
Visually check oil level. Check filler cap, and chip detector plug for security.

5. Tail Rotor Blades ............................. CONDITION AND CLEANLINESS


6. Tail Rotor .................................. CONDITION AND FREE MOVEMENT
ON FLAPPING AXIS

7. Tail Rotor Yoke....................................... CONDITION OF STATIC STOP


Evidence of static stop contact damage (deformed static stop yield indicator).

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EC-17


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

8. Tail Skid....................................................................... CONDITION AND


SECURITY

9. Intermediate (42°) gearbox ............... VERIFY ACTUAL PRESENCE OF


OIL IN SIGHT GAGE
Visually check oil level. Check filler cap and chip detector plug for security.

10. Elevator........................................................................ CONDITION AND


SECURITY

11. Tailboom................................................................................ CONDITION

EC-18 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

12. Baggage Compartment ......... CARGO SECURED; SMOKE DETECTOR


CONDITION; DOOR SECURED

Fuselage—Aft Right Side


1. Rotor Blade (right) .................................................. REMOVE TIEDOWN

Visually check condition and cleanliness.

2. Aft Compartment ........................................................................... CHECK


UNOBSTRUCTED

3. Tail Rotor Actuator ........................................................................ CHECK

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EC-19


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

4. Engine Fire Extinguisher .............. CHECK BOTTLE PRESSURE GAGE


AND TEMPERATURE RANGE

5. Combining Gearbox Oil Level ................ VERIFY ACTUAL PRESENCE


OF OIL IN SIGHT GAGE

6. Oil Cooler Blower........................................................ UNOBSTRUCTED

EC-20 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

7. No. 2 Engine Compartment ........................................................... CHECK

8. No. 2 Engine Oil Level ..................... VERIFY ACTUAL PRESENCE OF


OIL IN SIGHT GAGE

Visually check oil level and filler cap.

9. Access Doors and


Engine Cowling......................................................................... SECURED

10. Fuel Filler................................................................... VISUALLY CHECK


QUANTITY; SECURED

Fuselage—Cabin Right Side


1. Passenger Door ............................................................ CONDITION AND
OPERATION

Glass clean. Condition of pop-out windows.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EC-21


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

2. Transmission Oil ..................................... VERIFY ACTUAL PRESENCE


OF OIL IN SIGHT GAGE

Visually check oil level.

3. Position Lights....................................................................... CONDITION

4. Landing Gear......................................................................... CONDITION

Handling wheels removed.

5. Passenger Step (if installed) ........................................ CONDITION AND


SECURITY

6. Pilot Door .................................................................... CONDITION AND


SECURITY

Glass clean. Check security of emergency release handles.

EC-22 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Cabin Top
1. Hub and Sleeve Assembly.............................................................. CHECK
CONDITION

2. Swashplate, Support Assembly


and Collective Lever ...................................................................... CHECK
CONDITION

3. Main Rotor Pitch Links .................................................. SECURITY AND


CONDITION

4. Main Rotor Hub ................................................................... CHECK AND


GENERAL CONDITION

a. Mast Retaining Nut .............................................................. SECURED


b. Yoke Assembly...................................................................CONDITION

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EC-23


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

c. Pitch Horns .................................................................SECURITY AND


CONDITION

d. Elastomeric Bearings,
Lead-Lag Dampers................................................ CHECK GENERAL
CONDITIONS

e. Blade Retention Bolts ............................................... SECURITY AND


PROPER LATCHING

f. Droop Restrainers ...................................................... SECURITY AND


CONDITION

Verify Droop Stop Clevis is in lower position of cam plate.

g. Simple Pendulum Absorbers..................................... SECURITY AND


CONDITION

5. Rotor Blades ....................................... VISUALLY CHECK CONDITION


AND CLEANLINESS

6. Main Driveshaft and Coupling..................CONDITION AND SECURITY


WHERE VISIBLE

Condition, security, and grease leakage. Check Temp-Plates (four places


each coupling) for evidence of elevated temperature indicated by dot
changing color to black.

CAUTION
IF ANY TEMP-PLATE IS MISSING OR HAS BLACK
DOTS, MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL SHALL AS-
SIST IN DETERMINING AIRWORTHINESS.

7. Transmission Oil Filler Cap ...................................................... SECURED

8. No.1 and No.2


Hydraulic Reservoirs .................................... VISUALLY CHECK FLUID
LEVELS; CAPS SECURED

9. Antenna(s) ................................................................... CONDITION AND


SECURITY

10. Combining Gearbox


Oil Filler Cap............................................................................. SECURED

EC-24 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


EXPANDED CHECKLIST
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

11. Anticollision Light....................................................... CONDITION AND


SECURITY

12. No. 1 and No. 2


Engine Air Intakes.................................................. COVERS REMOVED;
UNOBSTRUCTED

Check that the particle separator doors are closed.

13. Engine and Transmission Cowling............................................ SECURED

14. Fresh Air Inlet Screen.................................................. UNOBSTRUCTED

15. Rotor Brake Reservoir Cap...................................................... SECURITY

INTERIOR CHECK
1. Cabin Interior .......................................................... CLEANLINESS AND
SECURITY OF EQUIPMENT

2. Cargo and Baggage


(if applicable) ............................................................ CHECK SECURITY

3. Protective Breathing
Equipment (if installed) ............................................... CONDITION AND
PROPERLY SERVICED

NOTE
Opening or removing doors shifts helicopter center
of gravity and reduces V NE . Refer to the Rotocraft
Flight Manual (RFM) Limitations and Weight &
Balance sections.

4. Passenger Doors ........................................................................ SECURED

Refer to the Normal Procedures section


to complete the Prestart checklist.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EC-25


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

NORMAL PROCEDURES
CONTENTS
Page
INTERIOR CHECK ...................................................................... NP-1

NORMAL PROCEDURES
Prestart Check ........................................................................... NP-1
Engine Starting ......................................................................... NP-6
Engine 1 Start ............................................................................ NP-6
Engine 2 Start ......................................................................... NP-10
Post Start.................................................................................. NP-11
Engine Fails to Start............................................................... NP-12
Cold Weather Start ................................................................. NP-13
Systems Checks ...................................................................... NP-15
Before Takeoff ........................................................................ NP-26
Power Assurance Check ........................................................ NP-28
OPERATION NEAR MAGNETIC DISTURBANCES .......... NP-28
TAKEOFF..................................................................................... NP-29
IN-FLIGHT OPERATION ......................................................... NP-30
DESCENT AND LANDING ..................................................... NP-32
AFTER LANDING ..................................................................... NP-32
ENGINE SHUTDOWN .............................................................. NP-33
POSTFLIGHT CHECK .............................................................. NP-35

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY NP-i


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

NORMAL PROCEDURES
INTERIOR CHECK
PRESTART CHECK

NORMAL PROCEDURES
1. Seat and Pedals ............................................................................. ADJUST

2. Seatbelt and Shoulder Harness............................ FASTEN AND ADJUST

3. Shoulder Harness Inertia Reel and Lock ....................................... CHECK

4. Directional Control Pedals......................................... CHECK FREEDOM


OF MOVEMENT

Position for engine start.

5. Flight Controls..................................................... POSITION FOR START

Friction as desired.

6. EEPROM READ Switch........................................................ LOCKED IN


DOWN POSITION

7. WOG OVERRIDE Switch (if installed) .......................................... NORM

8. Transmission Chip Detector Indicators.......................................... CHECK

Reset if required.

9. Lower Pedestal Circuit Breakers ............................................................. IN

10. Collective Control Head Switches ....................................................... OFF

11. COMPASS CONTROL Switch(es) .......................... MAG (slave position)

12. AHRS Control Panel Switches ......................... MAG POSITION (locked)


(S/N 36248 and subsequent)

13. Radio Equipment.................................................................................. OFF

14. FUEL INTCON Switch................................................................... NORM

15. FUEL TRANS Switches ...................................................................... OFF

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY NP-1


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

16. BOOST PUMP Switches ..................................................................... OFF

17. FUEL XFEED Switch ..................................................................... NORM

18. ENGINE 1 and ENGINE 2 FUEL Switches........................................ OFF

19. PART SEP Switches ........................................................................ NORM


NORMAL PROCEDURES

20. ENGINE 1 and ENGINE 2 GOV Switches ...................................... AUTO

21. HYDR SYS NO. 1 and NO. 2 Switches ................................................ ON

22. STEP Switch (if installed) .................................................... AS DESIRED

23. ROTOR RPM Audio Switch.................... SPRING-LOADED TO AUDIO

24. FORCE TRIM Switch ............................................... ON, COVER DOWN

25. Instruments ...................................................................... STATIC CHECK

26. STATIC SOURCE Switch


(if installed) ........................................................................................... PRI

27. APPROACH PLATE and MAP LIGHT Knob(s) ................................ OFF

28. AUX SYS PITOT and STATIC Switches


(if installed) ..................................................................................... NORM

29. Altimeter(s) .......................................................................................... SET

30. FIRE EXT Switch ................................................................................ OFF

31. FIRE PULL Handles ........................................................ IN (FORWARD)

32. AFT DOME LIGHT Rheostat and Switch........................................... OFF

33. PITOT STATIC HEATERS Switch...................................................... OFF

34. WIPER Switches.................................................................................. OFF

NP-2 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

35. CARGO RELEASE Switch


(if installed) .......................................................................................... OFF

36. HEATER Switch .................................................................................. OFF

37. AFT OUTLET Switch.......................................................................... OFF

NORMAL PROCEDURES
38. VENT BLOWER Switch ..................................................................... OFF

39. EMERG LT Switch (if installed) ................................................. DISARM

40. STBY ATT Switch (if installed) ........................................................ TEST

Check standby attitude indicator light illuminates, cage if desired.

41. WSHLD HEAT Switches (if installed) ................................................ OFF

42. Overhead Circuit Breakers ...................................................................... IN

43. All LT Rheostats................................................................................... OFF

44. UTILITY LIGHT Switch..................................................................... OFF

45. POSITION Light.................................................................................. OFF

46. ANTI COLL Light................................................................................. ON

47. EMERG LOAD Switch.............................................................. NORMAL

48. NON-ESNTL BUS Switch .......................................... SPRING-LOADED


TO NORMAL

49. INV 1 and 2 Switches .......................................................................... OFF

50. GEN 1 and 2 Switches ......................................................................... OFF

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY NP-3


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

NOTE
If external power is used—connect (1,000 amps max-
imum). Check 27 ± 1 VDC; adjust power source if
required.

51. BATTERY Switches


(BUS 1 and BUS 2) ............................................................................... ON
NORMAL PROCEDURES

Check BATTERY caution light illuminates.

NOTE
Test operate all lights when night flights are planned
or anticipated. Accomplish light tests with external
power connected or during engine runup. If Anti-
c o l l i s i o n l i g h t i s d e s i r e d, N O N - E S N T L
BUS—MANUAL.

52. INV 2 Switch ......................................................................................... ON

Confirm NO. 2 INVERTER caution extinguished and correct voltage


indication for NO. 1 and NO. 2 AC BUSES.

53. INV 1 Switch ......................................................................................... ON

Confirm both AC voltmeters cycle and indicate correct voltage for NO. 1
and NO. 2 AC BUSES and NO. 1 INVERTER caution extinguished.

54. ROTOR BRAKE Lights..................................................................... TEST

Pull brake ON and check that both lights illuminate; return to OFF and
check lights extinguish.

NOTE

Rotor brake shall be off at all times when


the engines are running.

55. Caution Panel TEST Switch ................................................................ PNL

All segments extinguish except CAUTION PANEL.

56. Caution Panel TEST Switch ................................................................... LT

All segments illuminate.

NP-4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

57. Caution Panel RESET Button.......................................................... PRESS

MASTER CAUTION light extinguishes.

58. FUEL SYS Test Switch ......................... FWD TANK, THEN MID TANK

Note digital and needle indications.

NORMAL PROCEDURES
59. FUEL SYS DIGITS TEST Button .................................................. PRESS

Digital display reads 888

60. BAGGAGE FIRE Warning Light Test Button ................ PRESS TO TEST

Verify light flashes.

61. FIRE 1 and 2 Warning Lights Test Button...................... PRESS TO TEST

62. OVER TORQ Caution Light............................................................ PRESS

Check light illuminates and mast torque indicator reads 105 +1%

CAUTION
If mast torque indicator indicates an error greater than
+1% from the 105% position, the mast torque system
is unreliable. Maintenance action is required.

63. CYC CTR Caution Lights............................................... PRESS TO TEST

64. WOG LT Advisory (if installed) .... WOG OVERRIDE SWITCH TO AIR

Confirm advisory light extinguished, reslect switch to NORM and confirm


advisory light illuminated.

65. CLOCK ................................................................... SET AND RUNNING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY NP-5


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

ENGINE STARTING
NOTE
If the helicopter has been cold soaked in ambient
temperatures of –18°C (0°F) or less, both throttles will
be diff icult to move and follow-through coupling
may be increased .
NORMAL PROCEDURES

1. Throttles ......................... ROTATE ENGINE 1 THROTTLE FULL OPEN


THEN BACK AGAINST IDLE STOP

Actuate ENG 1 IDLE STOP release, roll engine 1 throttle to full closed,
then apply friction as desired. Repeat procedure using engine 2 throttle
and ENG 2 IDLE STOP release.

NOTE
When either IDLE STOP release is activated, the ap-
propriate idle stop plunger will not release if pres-
sure is applied toward the closed position of the
throttle.

Moderate frictions should be applied to overcome follow-through coupling


between throttles.

2. RPM INCR/DECR Switch ................................ DECR FOR 8 SECONDS

ENGINE 1 START
NOTE
Either engine may be started f irst; however, the fol-
lowing procedure is provided for starting engine 1 first.

1. Engine 1 FUEL TRANS Switch............................................................ ON

Check No. 1 FUEL TRANS caution light extinguished.

2. Engine 1 BOOST PUMP Switch........................................................... ON

Check No. 1 FUEL BOOST light extinguished.

3. Engine 1 FUEL Switch.......................................................................... ON

FUEL VALVE caution light will illuminate momentarily.

NP-6 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

4. Engine 1 FUEL PRESS Indicator .................................................. CHECK

5. Rotor ............................................................................................. CLEAR

CAUTION
Prolonged exposure to ambient temperatures of 0°C

NORMAL PROCEDURES
(32°F) or less may freeze moisture in the engine fuel
control system. Monitor ENG RPM (N 2 ) during cold
weather starting for overspeed. If an overspeed ap-
pears imminent, abort start and close throttle to the
OFF position.

6. START Switch .............................................................. ENG 1 POSITION

Observe starter limitations

7. Engine 1 ENGINE OIL Pressure.......................................... INDICATING

8. Engine 1 Throttle ................................................ OPEN TO IDLE AT 12%

GAS PROD RPM (N1)...............................................................MINIMUM

9. Engine 1 ITT....................................................................... MONITOR TO


AVOID HOT START

Maximum ITT during start is 1090°C, not to exceed two seconds above
960°C. If ITT continues to rise, abort start by activating idle stop release
and rolling throttle to fully closed. Starter should remain engaged until
ITT decreases. Do not attempt restart until corrective maintenance has
been accomplished.

NOTE
If engine fails to start, refer to False Start proce-
dures this section.

10. Collective Pitch............................................................ ENSURE IN FULL


DOWN POSITION

CAUTION
If stick centering indicator system is inoperative,
ground operation shall be conducted at 97% ROTOR
RPM or above.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY NP-7


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

NOTE
On side slopes greater than f ive degrees, disregard
CYC CTR caution lights and position cyclic as desired.

11. Cyclic ........................................................................................ POSITION

Position as necessary to extinguish CYC CTR caution lights.


NORMAL PROCEDURES

NOTE
CYC CTR caution lights are inhibited between 95 and
105% ROTOR RPM.

12. START Switch............................................... CENTERED (OFF) AT 55%


GAS PROD RPM (N1)

13. N1 RPM ............................................................... CHECK 61± 1% WHEN


THROTTLE IS ON IDLE STOP

NOTE
Do not increase ROTOR above 85% rpm until XMSN
OIL temperature is above 15˚C.

14. Engine, XMSN, and


GEARBOX OIL Pressures............................................................. CHECK

15. Engine 1 PART SEP OFF Caution Light ....................................... CHECK


EXTINGUISHED

CAUTION
During rpm increase, any abnormal increase in one-
per-rev vibration may indicate one or more main
rotor droop restrainers failed to disengage from static
position. Verify proper operation prior to flight.

16. Engine 1 Throttle ............................................................... INCREASE TO


77 to 85% ENG RPM (N2)

Friction as desired

NP-8 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

NOTE
Minimize blade flapping by maintaining highest rotor
rpm (N R ) within allowable range.

17. Rotor rpm (NR) ..................................................... MINIMUM 77 TO 85%


AS DESIRED

NORMAL PROCEDURES
NOTE
If external power is used, proceed to Engine 2 Start.
If battery was used, proceed as follows.

18. N1 rpm ............................................................... CHECK 71% MINIMUM

19. GEN 1 Switch ........................................................................................ ON

NOTE
Before attempting generator assisted start on second
engine, it is recommended that the battery be charged
until the ammeter load drops below 150 amps.

20. AMPS 1 Indicator.............................................................. CHECK AT OR


BELOW 150 AMPS

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY NP-9


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

ENGINE 2 START
1. Engine 2 FUEL TRANS Switch............................................................ ON

Check No. 2 FUEL TRANS caution light extinguished.

2. Engine 2 BOOST PUMP Switch........................................................... ON


NORMAL PROCEDURES

Check No. 2 FUEL BOOST light out (FUEL XFEED caution light will
illuminate momentarily).

3. Engine 2 FUEL Switch.......................................................................... ON

FUEL VALVE caution light will illuminate momentarily.

4. Engine 2 FUEL PRESS Indicator .................................................. CHECK

5. START Switch .............................................................. ENG 2 POSITION

Observe starter limitations.

6. Engine 2 ENGINE OIL Pressure.......................................... INDICATING

7. Engine 2 Throttle ................................................ OPEN TO IDLE AT 12%


GAS PROD RPM (N1)

8. Engine 2 ITT ............................................................................. MONITOR

Observe ITT limitations.

9. START Switch............................................... CENTERED (OFF) AT 55%


GAS PROD RPM (N1)

10. GAS PROD ................................................... CHECK 61 ± 1% RPM (N1)

When engine 2 throttle is on idle stop

NP-10 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

CAUTION
Ensure second engine engages as throttle is increased.
A nonengaged engine indicates 10 to 15% higher
N 2 rpm than the engaged engine and near zero torque.
If a nonengagement occurs, close the throttle of the
nonengaged engine. When the nonengaged engine has

NORMAL PROCEDURES
stopped, shut down the engaged engine. If a sudden
(hard) engagement occurs, shut down both engines.
Maintenance action is required.

11. Engine 2 Throttle ......................................................INCREASE SLOWLY


TO MATCH ENGINE 1 N2 RPM

Monitor tachometer and torquemeter to verify the engagement of


second engine.

12. Engine 2 Oil Pressure..................................................................... CHECK

13. ENG 2 PART SEP


OFF Caution Light .......................................... CHECK EXTINGUISHED

POST START
1. ROTOR RPM (NR) .............................................. 77 TO 85% OR ABOVE

NOTE
If external power was used—disconnect. GEN 1
Switch—ON.

2. GEN 2 Switch ........................................................................................ ON

BATTERY BUS 1 will switch OFF automatically.

CAUTION
Only BATTERY BUS 2 switch should remain on with
both generators operating.

NOTE
During rpm increase, any abnormal increase in one-
per-rev vibration may indicate one or more main
rotor droop restrainers failed to disengage from static
position. Verify proper operation prior to flight.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY NP-11


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

3. Caution Lights ........................................ CHECK ALL EXTINGUISHED


(EXCEPT AFCS)

4. Engine, XMSN and GEARBOX OIL


Temperatures and Pressures............................................ WITHIN LIMITS

5. AMPS 1 and 2 ................................................................ WITHIN LIMITS


NORMAL PROCEDURES

NOTE
AMPS 2 will indicate a higher load than AMPS 1 until
battery is fully charged.

6. Radios......................................................................... ON AS REQUIRED

7. ELT (if installed)....................................... CHECK FOR INADVERTENT


TRANSMISSION

ENGINE FAILS TO START


When the engine fails to start within 15 seconds after the throttle has been
opened to idle, the following action is recommended:

1. IDLE STOP Release .................................................................. ACTUATE

2. Throttle ........................................................................... FULLY CLOSED

3. Starter ............................................................................................................
DISENGAGE

4. BOOST PUMP Switch......................................................................... OFF

5. FUEL Switch........................................................................................ OFF

After GAS PROD RPM (N 1 ) has decreased to zero, allow 30 seconds for fuel
to drain from engine.

Before attempting another start:

6. Dry Motoring Run (see below) ................................................ CONDUCT

NP-12 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Dry Motoring Run


The following procedure is used to clear an engine whenever it is deemed nec-
essary to remove internally trapped fuel and vapor:

1. Throttle ........................................................................... FULLY CLOSED

2. BOOST PUMP Switch .......................................................................... ON

NORMAL PROCEDURES
3. FUEL Switch ......................................................................................... ON

4. IGN Circuit Breaker ................................................................. PULL OUT

5. Starter ............................................................................................................
ENGAGE FOR 15 SECONDS,
THEN DISENGAGE

6. BOOST PUMP Switch......................................................................... OFF

7. FUEL Switch........................................................................................ OFF

8. IGN Circuit Breaker..................................................................... PUSH IN

Allow the required cooling period for the starter before proceeding. Follow
normal start sequence as described on preceding pages.

COLD WEATHER START


NOTE
This procedure is applicable to either engine.

NOTE
During extremely cold ambient temperatures, idle
rpm will be high and the ENGINE, XMSN, and GEAR
BOX OIL pressure may exceed limits for up to two
minutes after starting. Warm up shall be conducted
at 77 to 85% N R at flat pitch.

1. Throttle............................................................................ IDLE POSITION

2. GOV switch ................................................................................ MANUAL

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY NP-13


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

3. Throttle....................................................OPEN SLOWLY TO MAINTAIN


77 TO 85% ENG RPM (N2).
FRICTION AS DESIRED

NOTE
Continue with applicable procedures in ENGINE
START, POST START and SYSTEMS CHECK while
NORMAL PROCEDURES

warming up engines.

4. Warm-up............................ MAINTAIN ENGINES IN MANUAL MODE


FOR A DURATION OF 3 MINUTES OR UNTIL
REACHING AN ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE OF 50oC

After warm-up:

CAUTION
D o n o t a l l ow g a s p r o d u c e r t o d e c r e a s e b e l ow
50% RPM (N 1 ).

5. Throttle............................................................................ IDLE POSITION

6. GOV switch ............................................................... RETURN TO AUTO

7. Throttle ..................................... INCREASE TO 77-85% ENG RPM (N2).


FRICTION AS DESIRED.

8. Complete all remaining procedures SYSTEMS CHECK.

NP-14 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

SYSTEMS CHECKS
Stick Centering Indicator Check
CAUTION
During extreme cold ambient temperatures limit
cyclic movements until XMSN OIL temperature

NORMAL PROCEDURES
reaches 15°C.

CAUTION
Do not displace cyclic more than 1.5 inches from
center to check the system. If CYC CTR caution
lights do not illuminate within the 1.5 inch dis-
placement, the system is inoperative.

Do not displace cyclic beyond point at which CYC


CTR caution light illuminates.

NOTE
CYC CTR caution lights are inhibited between 95 and
105% ROTOR RPM.

1. Cyclic .......................................................... DISPLACE APPROX 1.25 IN


(31.7 mm) FORWARD,
AFT, LEFT AND RIGHT

Check CYC CTR caution light illuminates each time when displaced and
extinguishes when centered.

Force Trim Check


1. Flight Controls................................................................. FRICTION OFF;
COLLECTIVE LOCK REMOVED

2. Cyclic and Pedals ............................................. MOVE SLIGHTLY EACH


DIRECTION TO CHECK
FORCE GRADIENTS

3. Yaw Trim Release Switch (if installed) ....................... PRESS FORWARD

Check that yaw trim only releases and then reengages with switch released.

4. Cyclic FORCE TRIM Release Button ....................................... DEPRESS

Check trim releases with button depressed; reengages when button is released.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY NP-15


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

5. FORCE TRIM Switch.......................................................................... OFF

Check trim disengages and FT OFF caution light illuminates.

6. FORCE TRIM Switch............................................... ON; COVER DOWN

Preliminary Hydraulic Check


NORMAL PROCEDURES

1. Throttles .............................................................................. SET TO IDLE

NOTE
An electrical interlock prevents both hydraulic sys-
tems from being switched OFF at the same time. If
one system is OFF and the second is switched OFF,
the second system will remain ON.

NOTE
Uncommanded control movement or motoring with
either hydraulic system off may indicate hydraulic sys-
tem malfunction.

2. NO. 1 HYDR SYS Switch .................................................................. OFF

Check NO. 1 HYDRAULIC caution light and MASTER CAUTION light


illuminate and system 1 pressure drops to approximately 200 PSI or less.

3. NO. 2 HYDR SYS Switch .................................................................. OFF

Check hydraulic system 2 remains operational and system 1 remains OFF.

4. NO. 1 HYDR SYS Switch .................................................................... ON

Check NO. 1 HYDRAULIC caution light extinguishes and system 1


regains normal pressure. Check NO. 2 HYDRAULIC caution light
illuminate and system 2 pressure drops to approximately 200 PSI or less.

5. NO. 1 HYDR SYS Switch .................................................................. OFF

Check hydraulic system 1 remains operational and system 2 remains OFF.

6. NO. 1 HYDR SYS Switch .................................................................... ON

7. NO. 2 HYDR SYS Switch .................................................................... ON

Check NO. 2 HYDRAULIC caution light extinguishes and system 2


regains normal pressure..

NP-16 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Engine Fuel Control Check


1. Throttles (both)................................................................................... IDLE

CAUTION
Do not allow GAS PROD to decrease below 50%
rpm (N 1 ).

NORMAL PROCEDURES
NOTE
In the vicinity of 8,000 feet pressure altitude, GAS
PROD RPM (N 1 ) may not change signif icantly when
manual fuel control is selected.

2. GOV Switch (Engine 1 or 2) ...................................................... MANUAL

Observe a change in the GAS PROD RPM (N1) and GOV MANUAL
caution light illuminates. Open respective throttle carefully to ensure GAS
PROD RPM (N1) responds upward, then return to flight idle position.
Return GOV switch to AUTO. Check for a return to original GAS PROD
RPM (N1) and GOV MANUAL caution light extinguishes. Check second
governor in like manner.

3. Throttles (both) ....................................................... INCREASE SLOWLY


ABOVE 85% ROTOR RPM

Governor Check
CAUTION
If helicopter is sitting on ice or other slippery or
loose surface, advance throttles slowly to prevent
rotation of helicopter.

1. Engine 1 Throttle .................................................................. FULL OPEN

2. ENG ................................................STABILIZED AT 95 ± 1% RPM (N2)

3. Engine 2 Throttle ................................................................... FULL OPEN

Check No. 1 engine increases 2% ENG RPM (N2) and both engines
stabilize at 97 ± 1% ENG RPM (N2).

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY NP-17


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

NOTE
Helicopter rigged for category A operations will ob-
tain 103% ENG RPM N 2 . Refer to Flight Manual
Supplement BHT-412-FMS-62.3 and 62.4 for Air-
speed Limitations.

4. RPM INCR/DECR Switch...................................................... FULL INCR


NORMAL PROCEDURES

Check ENG does not exceed 101.5% rpm (N 2 ). Set at 100% ENG
RPM (N2).

Fuel Crossfeed and Interconnect Valve Check


1. FUEL XFEED/INTCON
Test Switch ....................................................... TEST BUS 1 AND HOLD

NOTE
After turning either boost pump off, FUEL BOOST
caution light should illuminate on failed side only.

2. Engine 1 BOOST PUMP Switch ......................................................... OFF

Check Engine 1 fuel pressure decreases, then returns to normal. (This


indicates that the crossfeed valve has been opened by Bus No. 1 power and
that the check valve is functioning properly.) Return switch to ON.

3. FUEL INTCON Switch .................................................................... OPEN

Check FUEL INTCON caution light illuminates, then extinguishes. (This


indicates that the interconnect valve has been opened by Bus No. 1 power
and that the valve is functioning properly.)

4. FUEL INTCON Switch ...................................................... OVRD CLOSE

Check FUEL INTCON caution light illuminates, then extinguishes.

5. FUEL XFEED/INTCON Test Switch .............. TEST BUS 2 AND HOLD

6. Engine 2 BOOST PUMP Switch ......................................................... OFF

Check Engine 2 fuel pressure decreases, then returns to normal. Return


switch to ON.

NP-18 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

7. FUEL INTCON Switch .................................................................... OPEN

Check FUEL INTCON caution light illuminates, then extinguishes. (This


indicates that the interconnect valve has been opened by Bus No. 2 power
and that the valve is functioning properly.)

8. FUEL INTCON Switch................................................................... NORM

NORMAL PROCEDURES
Check FUEL INTCON caution light illuminates, then extinguishes.

9. FUEL XFEED/INTCON Test Switch ............................................. NORM

10. FUEL XFEED Switch ........................................................ OVRD CLOSE

11. Engine 1 BOOST PUMP Switch ......................................................... OFF

Check fuel pressure drops to zero on affected system. Return switch to


ON. Repeat procedure for engine 2 BOOST PUMP switch.

12. FUEL XFEED Switch ..................................................................... NORM

Electrical Systems Check


1. DC VOLTS ............................................................ CHECK 27 ± 1 VOLTS

2. AC VOLTS ................................................... CHECK 104 TO 122 VOLTS

3. AMPS 1 and 2.................................................. CHECK WITHIN LIMITS

4. GEN 1 and 2 Switches ......................................................................... OFF

5. EMERG LOAD Switch .................................................... EMERG LOAD

Check that the following items remain operational:

• AP 2 • Pilot ICS
• VHF #1 • STBY ATT Indicator
• Pilot Map Light • Essential Engine Instruments

6. EMERG LOAD Switch ............................................................. NORMAL

7. GEN 1 and 2 Switches .......................................................................... ON

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY NP-19


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

8. INV 1 Switch........................................................................................ OFF

Check INVERTER 1 caution light illuminates. Check No. 1 and No. 2 AC


VOLTS for indication that Inverter 2 has assumed all AC loads.

9. RETURN INV 1 Switch ........................................................................ ON


NORMAL PROCEDURES

10. INV 2 Switch........................................................................................ OFF

Check INVERTER 2 caution light illuminates. Check No. 1 and No. 2 AC


VOLTS for indication that Inverter 1 has assumed all AC loads.

11. RETURN INV 2 Switch ........................................................................ ON

12. STBY ATT Switch (if installed) ............................................................ ON

13. EMERG LT Switch (if installed) ....................................................... TEST

Check all emergency lights illuminate. Switch to ARM; check lights dim
to faint glow.

Hydraulic Systems Check


NOTE
The hydraulic systems check is to determine proper
operation of the hydraulic actuators for each flight
control system. If abnormal forces, unequal forces,
control binding or motoring are encountered, it may
be an indication of a malfunctioning flight control
actuator.

1. FORCE TRIM Switch.......................................................................... OFF

2. Collective............................................................................. FULL DOWN;


FRICTION REMOVED

3. Rotor ......................................................................... SET TO 100% RPM

4. Cyclic .................................................................................... CENTERED;


FRICTION REMOVED

5. HYDR SYS NO. 1 Switch ................................................................... OFF

Check No. 1 HYDRAULIC caution light illuminates and


system 1 pressure drops to 200 PSI or less.

NP-20 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

6. Cyclic........................................... CHECK FOR NORMAL OPERATION

Move cyclic forward, aft, left, and right approximately one inch.
Center cyclic.

7. Collective..................................... CHECK FOR NORMAL OPERATION

NORMAL PROCEDURES
Increase collective control 1 to 2 inches. Repeat 2 to 3 times as required.
Return to full down position.

8. Pedals ................................................................... DISPLACE SLIGHTLY


LEFT AND RIGHT

Note an increase in force is required to move pedal in each direction.

9. HYDR SYS NO. 1 Switch..................................................................... ON

Check NO. 1 HYDRAULIC caution light extinguishes,


and system 1 regains normal pressure.

10. HYDR SYS NO. 2 Switch ................................................................... OFF

Check NO. 2 HYDRAULIC caution light illuminates and


system 2 pressure drops to 200 PSI or less.

11. Cyclic........................................... CHECK FOR NORMAL OPERATION

Move cyclic forward, aft, left and right approximately 1 inch. Center
cyclic.

12. Collective..................................... CHECK FOR NORMAL OPERATION

Increase collective control 1 to 2 inches. Repeat 2 to 3 times as required.


Return to full down position.

13. Pedals ................................................................... DISPLACE SLIGHTLY


LEFT AND RIGHT

Note the pedals are now boosted.

14. HYDR SYS NO. 2 Switch..................................................................... ON

Check NO. 2 HYDRAULIC caution light extinguishes,


and system 2 regains normal pressure.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY NP-21


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

15. Cyclic and Collective Friction...................................... SET AS DESIRED

16. FORCE TRIM Switch ........................................................................... ON

Check FT OFF caution light extinguishes.


NORMAL PROCEDURES

WARNING

Both hydraulic systems shall be operational prior to


takeoff.

NOTE
System 1 will normally operate 10 to 20°C cooler than
system 2.

AFCS Check
NOTE
Verif ication of AFCS actuator centering is neces-
sary. Failure of the actuators to center could result in
reduced control margins (pitch and roll) and abnor-
mal control positions (pitch, roll, and yaw).

NOTE
For S/N 36087–36247, if fast slaving is desired,
center ADI roll trim knob, then push and hold VG
FAST ERECT button until attitude indicator displays
zero degrees bank angle. Use of VG FAST ERECT
button will disengage the respective autopilot.

NOTE
(S/N 36248 and subsequent) Depending on procedures
performed during the start sequence, the HSI head-
ing OFF flag may not retract at end of AHRS align-
ment phase. Refer to Manual AHRS Heading
Synchronization procedure.

NP-22 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

1. Pilot and Copilot Attitude Indicators ............................ ERECT AND SET


AS NECESSARY

WARNING

NORMAL PROCEDURES
If AFCS is left engaged in ATT mode during ground
operation, it can drive the cyclic stick to a control stop.

2. AP 1 and AP 2 .................................................... VERIFY DISENGAGED

3. Cyclic FORCE TRIM Switch ................................................. CHECK ON

For helicopters not equipped with Flight Director Kit: Press and hold the
CPL switch on autopilot control panel. While holding CPL switch, press
the TEST switch. Release both switches—verify TEST ON.

NOTE
AUTO TRIM light will remain illuminated during
AFCS test.

4. AFCS TEST Switch........................................... ON FOR LEVEL 1 TEST

5. AL-300 Air Data Display (ADD) .......................... VERIFY READS LE 1

6. AP 1 Light.................................................................. VERIFY FLASHES,


THEN PRESS

NOTE
Pilot shall closely monitor controls during test, tak-
ing care not to restrict control movements. To prevent
nuisance failures, hands must remain off controls.

7. Cyclic .............................................. VERIFY MOVEMENT AFT RIGHT


APPROXIMATELY ONE INCH,
THEN RETURN TO NEUTRAL

8. AP 2 Light.................................................................. VERIFY FLASHES,


THEN PRESS

9. Cyclic .............................................. VERIFY MOVEMENT AFT RIGHT


APPROXIMATELY ONE INCH,
THEN RETURN TO NEUTRAL

Upon completion of test, verify that the AP 1 and AP 2 lights extinguish and
AL-300 reads END 1.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY NP-23


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

If error codes are present, press SBY (or cyclic NAV STBY switch) once to
view each code until END 1 is displayed.

AHRS equipped helicopters (S/N 36248 and subsequent), should perform


AHRS check.

Press cyclic grip NAV STBY to continue with level 2 test if desired, or press
TEST switch to exit AFCS test.
NORMAL PROCEDURES

AHRS Equipped Helicopters (S/N 36248 and Subsequent)


1. Confirm AFCS TEST flashing. ADI Pitch and Roll adjustment indicies
aligned.

2. Press and hold AHRS control panel No. 1 and No. 2 TEST switches.

NOTE
Test may be performed in MAG or DG mode. If TEST
is accomplished in DG mode, heading must be man-
ually aligned.

3. Verify following responses for each system:

HSI
Heading ....................................................................... ROTATES TO 015o
Heading OFF Flag ....................................................................... IN VIEW

ADI
Pitch ................................................... APPROXIMATELY 5o NOSE UP
Roll ...................................................... APPROXIMATELY 45o RIGHT

ATT Flag ...................................................................................... IN VIEW

RT Flag ........................................................................................ IN VIEW

AHRS Control Panel


o/+ Indicator.................................................. NEEDLE DEFLECTION - o

4. Release AHRS TEST switch and confirm correct heading, altitude and all
flags retracted.

5. Press AFCS TEST switch to exit test mode.

NP-24 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Cabin Heater Check

1. GAS PROD .......................................................... CHECK 75% RPM (N1)


MINIMUM (BOTH ENGINES)

2. Thermostat Knob ................................................................... FULL COLD

NORMAL PROCEDURES
CAUTION
Do not operate heater above 21°C OAT.

CAUTION
HEATER switch shall be turned OFF when heated air-
flow does not shut off after thermostat is turned to
full COLD, HEATER AIR LINE light illuminates, or
CABIN HTR circuit breaker trips.

3. HEATER Switch.................................................................................... ON

4. VENT BLOWER Switch ....................................................................... ON

5. Thermostat Setting ...................................... INCREASE AND OBSERVE


HEATED AIRFLOW

6. DEFOG Lever........................................................................................ ON

Check airflow is diverted from pedestal outlets to windshield nozzles.


Return lever to OFF.

7. AFT OUTLET Switch ........................................................................... ON

Check airflow distributed equally between pedestal outlets and aft outlets.
Return switch to OFF.

NOTE
Heater operation affects performance. Refer to Hover
Ceiling and Rate of Climb charts for HEATER ON
in the Performance chapter.

8. HEATER Switch................................................................... AS DESIRED

9. VENT BLOWER Switch...................................................... AS DESIRED

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY NP-25


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

BEFORE TAKEOFF
1. Engine, Gearbox,
Transmission, Hydraulic and
Electrical Instruments ........................... WITHIN OPERATING RANGES

2. Caution and Warning Lights .......................................... EXTINGUISHED


NORMAL PROCEDURES

3. Flight Instruments ....... CHECK OPERATION AND SET AS FOLLOWS

• IVSI...........................................................NEEDLE NEAR ZERO


• Altimeter ..........................................................SET AND CHECK
• HSI .......................................................................................CHECK
• ADI ......................................................................................CHECK
• STBY ATT (if installed) ...................................................CHECK
• Radio Altimeter.....................................ZERO ALTITUDE; OFF
FLAG RETRACTED;
DH SET AS DESIRED

WARNING

If AFCS is left engaged in ATT mode during ground


operation, it can drive the cyclic stick to a control stop.

4. AFCS ........................................................... AP 1 AND AP 2 ENGAGED


AND SELECT ATT OR
SAS MODE AS DESIRED

ATT mode shall be used during IFR flight; SAS mode is recommended for
ground operations, hover, and takeoff.

5. TRIM/FD 1 or 2.................................................................... AS DESIRED

NOTE
Cyclic inputs with Force Trim ON in SAS mode may
cause a false illumination of AUTOTRIM caution.

6. FORCE TRIM Switch................................................ ON IN ATT MODE;


AS DESIRED IN SAS MODE

7. Auxiliary Navigation Panel ....................................................AS DESIRED

NP-26 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

WARNING

Moderate friction shall be applied to overcome


follow-through coupling between throttles.

8. Throttles ................................................................................. FULL OPEN

NORMAL PROCEDURES
Adjust frictions.

9. ENG ............................................................................... 100% RPM (N2)


FOR BOTH ENGINES

10. Position Lights................................................................... AS REQUIRED

11. ANTI COIL Light ................................................................... CHECK ON

12. PITOT-STATIC HEATERS Switch........................................................ ON

Check ammeter for load indication. Leave ON in visible moisture when


temperature is below 4.4˚C (40˚F); turn OFF if not required.

13. Radio(s) ............................................................. CHECK FUNCTIONING

14. EMERGENCY COMM


Panel (if installed) ....................................................CHECK FOR SINGLE
PILOT OPERATIONS

15. Cyclic Control .............................................. CENTERED OR SLIGHTLY


INTO THE WIND

16. COCKPIT VOICE RECORDER


TEST Switch (if installed) ...........................................PRESS AND HOLD
FOR 3 SECONDS

Verify meter indicates GOOD.

17. STEP Switch (if installed) ......................................................AS DESIRED

18. Passenger Seat Belts ................................................................ FASTENED

19. All Doors ................................................................................... SECURED

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY NP-27


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

POWER ASSURANCE CHECK


Power assurance check should be performed daily.

Prolonged Ground Operation


NOTE
NORMAL PROCEDURES

For prolonged ground operation, AFCS shall not be


operated in ATT mode.

CAUTION
Minimum rotor—97% rpm for ground operation with
stick centering indicator system inoperative.

NOTE
Fo r g r o u n d o p e r a t i o n , m a i n t a i n r o t o r r p m
(N R ) within allowable range. Higher minimum rotor
rpm reduces blade flapping.

1. Rotor ...................................................... 77% TO 85% RPM OR ABOVE

2. Cyclic .......................................................... POSITION AS NECESSARY

Position as necessary to extinguish CYC CTR caution lights.

NOTE
On side slopes greater than five degrees, maintain 100%
ROTOR RPM. CYC CTR caution lights are inhibited.

OPERATION IN OR NEAR MAGNETIC


DISTURBANCES
(S/N 36248 AND SUBSEQUENT)

CAUTION
To avoid heading error, accomplish inflight AHRS
heading synchronization only in level flight and, if
flight director installed, uncoupled (STBY).

When operation AHRS equipped helicopters in an area of suspected adverse


magnetic disturbance (e.g., an off-shore oil platform), a signif icant heading
error can occur during landing and takeoff. Prior to landing or before take-
off, switch AHRS from MAG mode to DG mode and, if necessary, manually
align heading with visual reference. When clear of magnetic disturbance, switch
back to MAG mode to initiate automatic heading synchronization.

NP-28 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

TAKEOFF
CAUTION
During lift-off to hover, any abnormal increase in one-
per-rev vibration may indicate one or more main
rotor droop restrainers failed to disengage from static

NORMAL PROCEDURES
position. Verify proper operation prior to flight.

NOTE
When AFCS is in ATT mode, the FORCE TRIM re-
lease button and the CLTV/YAW TRIM REL switch
should be depressed before lift-off (to trim actuators
to center positions )and should be held until desired
climbout attitude is attained.

1. ENG ............................................................................... 100% RPM (N2)

2. AP 1 and AP 2.....................................................................AS REQUIRED

3. TRIM/FD 1 or 2......................................................................AS DESIRED

4. Area ............................................................................................. CLEAR

(AHRS equipped helicopters—S/N 36248 and subsequent).

CAUTION
Note HSI heading prior to liftoff. To ensure no mag-
netic disturbance exists, crosscheck heading in hover.
If discrepancy exists operate in DG mode (refer to
operations in or near magnetic disturbances).

NOTE
As collective is increased, it may be necessary to re-
match engine torques prior to reaching hover.

5. RPM (trim) Switch .............................ADJUST TO OBTAIN MATCHING


TORQUE, N1, OR ITT, AS
REQUIRED, AND 100% NR.

6. Hover Power............................................. CHECK TORQUE REQUIRED


TO HOVER AT FOUR FEET
SKID HEIGHT

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY NP-29


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

NOTE
Downwind takeoffs are not recommended since
the published takeoff distance performance will not
be achieved.

During takeoff, pitch attitude must be adjusted com-


mensurate with power application to prevent enter-
NORMAL PROCEDURES

ing the AVOID area of the Height-Velocity diagram.


Torque shall not exceed 15% above IGE hover power
while accelerating to Takeoff Climbout Safety Speed.
(Refer to the Performance chapter.)

7. Cyclic Control.............................................. APPLY FORWARD CYCLIC


TO ACCELERATE SMOOTHLY

8. Collective Pitch ....................................... ADJUST AS DESIRED AFTER


REACHING VTOCS (45 KIAS)

9. Airspeed.......................................................................... WITHIN LIMITS


(60 KIAS MINIMUM FOR IFR

IN-FLIGHT OPERATION

CAUTION
When operating near the maximum MAST TORQUE
limit, inadvertent overtorque may occur during ma-
neuvering flight conditions involving turns and/or
nose down attitude changes. Decrease power to 90%
MAST TORQUE prior to maneuvering helicopter.

CAUTION
For flight operations above 6,000 ft HD, maintain
100% N R /N 2 .

NOTE
Each period of continuous non-level flight (i.e., cir-
cling) exceeding 20 minutes will require a return to
wings level flight for a minimum of 60 seconds to
maintain AHRS accuracy.

1. ENG.........................................................................97 TO 100% RPM (N2)

2. Airspeed................................................................. WITHIN LIMITS FOR


FLIGHT ALTITUDE

NP-30 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

3. Engine, Gearbox, and


Transmission Instruments............................................... WITHIN LIMITS

NOTE
Maximum pitch attitude capability of standby attitude
indicator is ±60°.

NORMAL PROCEDURES
Refer to applicable operating rules for high altitude
oxygen requirements.

(AHRS equipped helicopters S/N 36248 and subsequent).

CAUTION
When AHRS is switched from DG to MAG mode, it
will instantaneously synchronize to detect magnetic
heading. Make switch selection only in level flight
to avoid invalid heading synchronization due to flux
valve sensing errors during turns.

Maneuvering with AFCS in SAS Mode


Use normal pilot control techniques.

Maneuvering with AFCS in ATT Mode


Depress cyclic FORCE TRIM release button and maneuver as desired. Release
button when desired attitude is reached. Autopilot will hold attitude until re-
trimmed to new attitude. Attitude may also be adjusted with cyclic ATTD
TRIM switch.

For momentary yaw changes, due to power change, press forward on YAW
TRIM REL switch (if installed), which releases pedal force trim only. Adjust
yaw with pedals, then release switch.

For momentary attitude changes, manual cyclic movement may be used. How-
ever, AFCS movement may be used. However, AFCS actuators may be satu-
rated to limit authority when cyclic is moved manually.

NOTE
In-flight use of VG FAST ERECT button (S/N
36087–36247) will disengage the respective autopilot.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY NP-31


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

DESCENT AND LANDING


1. Flight Controls .................................. ADJUST FRICTION AS DESIRED

Minimum friction for ATT mode operation.

2. AFCS ........................................................................... ENGAGE ATT OR


NORMAL PROCEDURES

SAS MODE AS DESIRED

3. FORCE TRIM Switch................................................ ON IN ATT MODE;


AS DESIRED IN SAS MODE

4. Throttles ................................................................................. FULL OPEN

5. ENG ............................................................................... 100% RPM (N2)

6. Flight Path............................................. STAY CLEAR OF AVOID AREA


OF HEIGHT-VELOCITY DIAGRAM

7. STEP Switch (if installed) .................................................... AS DESIRED

CAUTION
Run-on landings may result in roll oscillations while
on the ground. If this occurs, lowering collective
fully down or disengaging AP 1 and AP 2 will stop
the oscillations.

AFTER LANDING
1. Collective Pitch .................................................................... FULL DOWN

2. Pedals...................................................................................... CENTERED

3. FORCE TRIM Switch ........................................................................... ON

4. FORCE TRIM Release Button.............................DEPRESS AND CHECK


FOR ACTUATOR CENTERING

5. AFCS ...................................................................................... SAS MODE

NP-32 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

ENGINE SHUTDOWN
1. AP 1 and AP 2 ...................................................................... DISENGAGE

Check autopilot lights extinguish and AFCS and MASTER CAUTION


lights illuminate.

NORMAL PROCEDURES
2. Cyclic........................................................... FRICTIONED AS DESIRED

Maintain cyclic stick as near center as possible at all rotor speeds.

NOTE
Fo r g r o u n d o p e r a t i o n , m a i n t a i n r o t o r R P M
(N R ) within allowable range. Higher minimum rotor
rpm reduces blade flapping.

3. Throttle ........................................................ REDUCE TO 77 TO 85% NR

CAUTION
If stick centering indicator system is inoperative,
N R for ground operation shall be 97% or above.

4. Stick Centering Check............................................................ COMPLETE

Center cyclic and friction as necessary to extinguish CYC CTR caution lights.

NOTE
On side slopes greater than five degrees, disregard CYC
CTR caution lights and position cyclic as required.

5. ITT .................................................... STABILIZE FOR ONE MINUTE

6. ELT (if installed)....................................... CHECK FOR INADVERTENT


TRANSMISSION

7. STBY ATTD Switch (if installed)........................................................ OFF

8. EMERG LT Switch (if installed) ................................................. DISARM

9. Engine Instruments......................................................... WITHIN LIMITS

10. IDLE STOP Release Switch ......................................... ENG 1 POSITION

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY NP-33


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

11. Engine 1 Throttle ............................................................ FULLY CLOSED

Check ITT and GAS PROD RPM (N1) decreasing

12. BATTERY BUS 1 Switch ...................................................................... ON

13. IDLE STOP Release Switch ......................................... ENG 2 POSITION


NORMAL PROCEDURES

14. Engine 2 Throttle ............................................................ FULLY CLOSED

Check ITT and GAS PROD RPM (N1) decreasing

15. GEN 1 and 2 Switches ......................................................................... OFF

16. INV 1 and 2 Switches .......................................................................... OFF

17. Engine 1 and 2 FUEL Switches ........................................................... OFF

18. Engine 1 and 2


BOOST PUMP Switches ..................................................................... OFF

19. Engine 1 and 2


FUEL TRANS Switches ...................................................................... OFF

20. Radios................................................................................................... OFF

WARNING

Do not use collective to slow rotor rpm. Use of col-


lective to slow rotor rpm can cause excessive flap-
ping and/or coning.

CAUTION
Avoid rapid engagement of rotor brake if helicopter
is on ice or other slippery or loose surface to prevent
rotation of helicopter.

21. Rotor Brake .......................................................................... AS DESIRED

Apply at or below 40% ROTOR RPM. Return to stowed position after


main rotor stops.

NP-34 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

22. Pilot ................................................ REMAIN AT FLIGHT CONTROLS


UNTIL ROTOR HAS COME
TO A COMPLETE STOP

23. Lighting and


Miscellaneous Switches ....................................................................... OFF

NORMAL PROCEDURES
24. BATTERY BUS 1 and
BUS 2 Switches.................................................................................... OFF

25. Collective Down Lock....................................... SECURED AS DESIRED

POSTFLIGHT CHECK
If conditions require, perform the following (refer to Manufacturer’s Data
BHT-412-MD-4, Section 4, for additional information):

1. Droop Restraint System ...................... CHECK GENERAL CONDITION

Verify that the droop restraint arms are engaged in the lower detent of the
cam window.

2. Main Rotor Blade Tiedown Socks ...................... INSTALL ON BLADES/


SECURE TO MOORING POINTS

3. Tail Rotor Tiedown Strap............................................ INSTALL/SECURE


TO VERTICAL FIN

4. Exhaust Covers/Engine Inlet


Protective Plugs/Pitot Tube Covers ............................................. INSTALL

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY NP-35


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

EMERGENCY/MALFUNCTION
PROCEDURES
CONTENTS
Page
INTRODUCTION .......................................................................... EP-1
DEFINITIONS ............................................................................... EP-1
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES ................................................... EP-8
Engine Fires ............................................................................... EP-8
Smoke or Fumes in Cabin...................................................... EP-11
Baggage Compartment Fire .................................................. EP-11
Engine Failures ....................................................................... EP-12

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
Tail Rotor Failures .................................................................. EP-16
Main Driveshaft Failure ......................................................... EP-22
MALFUNCTION PROCEDURES ............................................ EP-23
Engine Hot Start and Shutdown ........................................... EP-23
Engine Restart In Flight ........................................................ EP-24
Engine Fuel Control Malfunctions ...................................... EP-26
Electrical Power Failures ....................................................... EP-31
Hydraulic System Failure ...................................................... EP-33
Communication System Failures.......................................... EP-34
Cabin Heater Malfunction ..................................................... EP-35
Fuel System Failures .............................................................. EP-36
Static Port Obstruction .......................................................... EP-37
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM ...................... EP-37
AFCS Malfunctions................................................................ EP-37
ATTITUDE HEADING REFERENCE SYSTEM (AHRS) ... EP-45
AHRS Alignment (s/n 36248 and subsequent) .................. EP-45
Automatic AHRS Realignment ............................................ EP-46
Manual AHRS Heading Synchronization ........................... EP-46
AHRS Fails to Realign ........................................................... EP-47
Stick Centering Indicator Failure......................................... EP-47

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-i


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

TABLES

Title Page
EP-1 WARNING LIGHTS ......................................................... EP-2
EP-2 CAUTION LIGHTS .......................................................... EP-3
EP-3 DIGITAL AFCS ERROR CODES................................ EP-38

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-iii


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

EMERGENCY/MALFUNCTION
PROCEDURES
INTRODUCTION
The following procedures contain the indications of equipment or system fail-
ure or malfunction, the use of emergency features of primary and back-up sys-
tems, and appropriate warnings, cautions and explanatory notes. Table EP-1
lists fault conditions and corrective actions required for illumination of RED
warning annunciators. Table EP-2 addresses malfunction procedures associ-
ated with AMBER caution annunciators.

All corrective action procedures listed herein assume the pilot gives f irst pri-
ority to aircraft control and a safe flight path.

The helicopter should not be operated following any emergency landing or


shutdown until the cause of the malfunction has been determined and corrective

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
maintenance action taken.

DEFINITIONS
The following terms indicate the degree of urgency in landing the helicopter:

• Land as soon as possible—Land without delay at the nearest suitable


area (i.e. open f ield) at which a safe approach and landing is reason-
ably assured.

• Land as soon as practical—The duration of the flight and landing site


are at the discretion of the pilot. Extended flight beyond the nearest
approved landing area is not recommended.

The following terms are used to describe the operating condition of a system,
subsystem, assembly, or component:

• Affected—Fails to operate in the normal or usual manner.

• Normal—Operates in the intended or usual manner.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-1


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Table EP-1. WARNING LIGHTS

PANEL FAULT CORRECTIVE


WORDING CONDITION ACTION
Fire indication in Pull illuminated FIRE PULL handle. Select
FIRE 1 PULL NO. 1 or NO. 2 engine MAIN fire extinguisher. Close throttle of
compartment affected engine. Select RESERVE fire ext.
FIRE 2 PULL if necessary. Land as soon as possible.

Smoke in baggage Reduce power to minimum required.


BAGGAGE FIRE compartment Land as soon as possible. Inspect
tailboom area for damage.
GAS PROD abnorm- Check ENG TORQUE, GAS PROD ENG
ENG 1 OUT ally low, below 53 RPM (N1), ENG RPM (N2) and ITT.
± 2% PRM on NO. 1 Adjust power and airspeed (70 KIAS).
ENG 2 OUT or NO. 2 engine Reset remaining ENG RPM (N2) to
normal range. Close throttle of affected
engine. Refer to ENGINE FAILURES and
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

RESTART INFLIGHT procedures. Land


as soon as practical.
Transmission oil Reduce power. Land as soon as possible.
XMSN OIL PRESS pressure below limit

Transmission oil Reduce power. Check XMSN OIL


XMSN OIL TEMP temperature above temperature. If not within limits, land as
limit soon as possible.

Combining gearbox Reduce power. Land as soon as possible.


C BOX OIL PRESS oil pressure below
normal
Combining gearbox Reduce power. Check gear box oil
C BOX OIL TEMP oil temperature above temperature. If not within limits, land as
normal soon as possible.
Battery case temp- BATTERY switches – OFF
BATTERY TEMP erature above limit Land as soon as practical.

WARNING

Battery shall not be used for engine start


after illumination of BATTERY TEMP light.
Battery shall be removed and serviced in
accordance with manufacturer's
instructions prior to return to service.

ROTOR Rotor brake linings Check rotor brake handle is fully up in


BRAKE not retracted detent. If light remains on, land as soon
as possible.

With Rotor RPM at or Adjust collective pitch and/or RPM INCR–


RPM Audio below 95% DECR switch as required. Refer to
ENGINE FUEL CONTROL
Without Rotor RPM at or MALFUNCTION procedures.
RPM Audio above 103.5%

EP-2 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Table EP-2. CAUTION LIGHTS

PANEL FAULT CORRECTIVE


WORDING CONDITION ACTION

OIL Engine oil pressure Shut down affected engine. Fuel INTCON
PRESSURE below limit. switch - OPEN. Land as soon as practical.

DC Failure of DC generator GEN FIELD and GEN RESET circuit breakers -


GENERATOR Check IN. GEN switch (affected generator) -
RESET, then ON.
If light remains on, turn GEN switch OFF.

If No. 2 generator failed:


BATTERY BUS 2 switch - OFF
BATTERY BUS 1 switch - ON

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
If nonessential bus power is required:
NON-ESNTL BUS switch - MANUAL
DC AMPS - Monitor

If both generators fail:


CAUTION
Do not select EMER LOAD at pressure
altitudes above 5,000 feet. Both FUEL BOOST
PUMPS will become inoperative, resulting
in possible fuel starvation.

EMER LOAD switch - As required.


Land as soon as practical.

PART SEP Particle seperator by- Check ENG 1 (or 2) RPM and PART SEP
OFF pass door closed or circuit breakers in.
circuit breaker out. Ice
and dust protection Move PART SEP switch to OVRD ON.
system inoperative.

NO. 1 FUEL Fuel boost pump faulure. If practical, descend below 5,000 feet to
BOOST prevent possible fuel starvation if other boost
pump fails.
NO. 2 FUEL
BOOST NOTE FUEL INTCON switch - OPEN
If either fuel boost pump Land as soon as practical.
fails and the FUEL
XFEED switch is in
NORM position, the
crossfeed valve is CAUTION
opened automatically
by a pressure switch, If either BOOST PUMP fails, usable fuel will be
allowing either boost approximately 60 pounds less than indicated.
pump to furnish fuel
to both engines.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-3


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Table EP-2. CAUTION LIGHTS (CONT)

PANEL FAULT CORRECTIVE


WORDING CONDITION ACTION

NO. 1 FUEL Fuel filter is partially Land as soon as practical.


FILTER blocked

NO. 2 FUEL
FILTER

Fuel level in left or Land as soon as practical.


FUEL LOW right cells at or below
(less than 100 lbs 190 pounds
between NO. 1
and NO. 2 fuel
quantities)
NOTE NOTE
The FUEL LOW light Interconnect valve will open automatically
will not illuminate for when fuel level in opposite side de-
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

the affected side when creases to 190 pounds (as indicated by


fuel quantity indicator illumination of FUEL INTCON caution light).
malfunction occurs. This will allow the fuel quantity in
Refer to FUEL the lower aft cells to equalize.
QUANTITY
INDICATION In the event of a fuel BOOST PUMP
MALFUNCTION failure, all fuel in the lower cells will be
available to both engines through either
boost pump.

FUEL INTCON caution light can be


extinguished by placing FUEL INTCON
switch in the OPEN position.

Possible fuel leak in FUEL INTCON switch –OVRD CLOSE.


FUEL LOW cell with lower quantity Land as soon as possible.
(100 lbs or more
difference between
NO. 1 and NO. 2
fuel quantities)

GOV Engine governor in Torque, ITT, and RPM must be controlled


MANUAL manual mode with throttle.

ENGINE Metal particles in Reduce power and shut down engine as


CHIP engine oil soon as practical to minimize engine
damage. Land as soon as practical.

FUEL Fuel valve not Check FUEL VALVE circuit breaker is in.
VALVE properly seated or Land as soon as practical. If on ground,
circuit breaker out. cycle FUEL switch.

EP-4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Table EP-2. CAUTION LIGHTS (CONT)

PANEL FAULT CORRECTIVE


WORDING CONDITION ACTION

NO. 1 GEN Generator over- GEN switch – OFF


OVHT heating

NO. 2 GEN
OVHT

Caution panel Check MASTER CAUTION circuit


CAUTION
PANEL inoperative breaker in. Monitor aircraft instruments.
Land as soon as practical.

NO. 1 Failure of AC power Check both AC voltmeters to determine


INVERTER inverter that remaining inverter automatically
assumed load for failed inverter.
NO. 2
INVERTER Check INV PWR circuit breakers in.
Reengage AP1 or AP2. If both inverters

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
fail during IFR flight, land as soon as
practical or continue flight under VFR, if
desired.

NO. 2 Emergency Load switch Place EMER LOAD switch in NORMAL


INVERTER EMER LOAD position position, if electrical load shedding is not
required.

EXTERNAL External power Check external power is disconnected.


POWER receptacle door open Check door is closed.

Passenger door(s) or Check doors are closed and locked.


DOOR LOCK baggage compartment
door not locked

Both BATTERY Turn one BATTERY switch ON, other


BATTERY switches/relays in the OFF. If light remains on, reverse
same position BATTERY switch positions.

Metal particle in Reduce power. Land as soon as practical.


C BOX CHIP combining gearbox
oil.
Metal particles in Reduce power. Land as soon as practical.
XMSN CHIP transmission oil (one
or more remote
XMSN CHIP
indicators tripped)

Metal particles in 42° Land as soon as practical.


42/90 BOX CHIP or 90° gearbox oil

NO. 1 Hydraulic pressure Verify fault and affect system from gauge
HYDRAULIC below limit or readings. Turn off affected system. Land
temperature above as soon as possible.
NO. 2 limit.
HYDRAULIC

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-5


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Table EP-2. CAUTION LIGHTS (CONT)

PANEL FAULT CORRECTIVE


WORDING CONDITION ACTION
Fuel transfer pump or Check Fuel TRANS circuit breaker–in.
NO. 1 FUEL TRANS ejector pump Check FUEL TRANS switch–ON.
malfunction (no
transfer from lower
NO. 2 FUEL TRANS forward and middle
CAUTION
cells to lower aft cell);
OR
If either TRANSFER PUMP fails, usable
Check VALVE fuel will be 25 pounds less than indicated.
MALFUNCTION
allowing fuel to leak
from aft to mid cell
If light remains illuminated, FUEL TRANS
after normal transfer is
switch –OFF.
complete. (Total fuel
800 pounds or less).
CAUTION
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

NOTE Fuel trapped in mid cells unusable and


FUEL TRANS light must be subtracted from total quantity
will remain illuminated indication.
after quantity
indication malfunction. Monitor MID TANK quantity periodically.
Refer to QUANTITY Land as soon as possible.
INDICATION
MALFUNCTION.
Fuel interconnect Check FUEL INTCON circuit breakers
FUEL INTCON valve not fully closed. (both) in. FUEL INTCON switch–OPEN,
(Automatic valve then NORM.
(switch in norm
opening is normal if
position)
FUEL LOW light is
also illuminated).
(switch in open FUEL interconnect Check FUEL INTCON circuit breakers
position) not fully open or FUEL in. FUEL INTCON switch–OVRD CLOSE,
INTCON circuit then OPEN.
breakers out.
Fuel crossfeed valve Check FUEL XFEED circuit breakers
FUEL XFEED not fully open, or (both) in. Cycle FUEL XFEED switch.
FUEL XFEED circuit
breakers out.

Heater mixing valve Turn HEATER switch OFF immediately.


HEATER AIR LINE malfunction

EP-6 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Table EP-2. CAUTION LIGHTS (CONT)

PANEL FAULT CORRECTIVE


WORDING CONDITION ACTION
Autopilot 1 or 2 Engage affected autopilot. If unable to
NO. 1 AUTOPILOT inoperative engage, continue flight on remaining
system.
NO. 2 AUTOPILOT Automatic flight Reduce airspeed to 115 KIAS or below.
control system Check AFCS control panel. If either auto-
hardover pilot is turned off, attempt to switch ON.
OR (Refer to AFCS malfunction procedures)
Loss of AC power to
AP1 or AP2
OR
Loss of attitude gyro During IFR flight, if both AP1 and AP2 are
input to AP1 or AP2. failed and will not reset, land as soon as
(Possible disengage- practical or continue flight under VFR if
ment of either or both desired.

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
autopilots)
OR
Auto trim malfunction. Reduce airspeed to 115 KIAS or below.
Displacement actuator Check actuator position panel. If APIs are
between AP1 and AP2 centered, depress SYS 2 button to check
actuators at least 50 AP2 actuator displacement. Turn off
percent travel affected system.

Pitch, roll or yaw trim Cycle either AP1 or AP2 OFF, then ON. If
AUTOTRIM inoperative light does not extinguish, follow AUTO-
TRIM FAILURE procedures in this
section.

Flight data recorder Refer to applicable regulations for


FDR SYS FAIL inoperative operating with flight data recorder
inoperative.
(if installed)

Force trim inoperative Check FORCE TRIM switch is ON and


FT OFF FORCE TRIM circuit breaker in. If system
remains inoperative during IFR flight,
land as soon as practical or continue
flight under VFR if desired. Pilot may
increase cyclic friction to provide
additional cyclic stabilization.

Cyclic not centered Center cyclic.


CYC CTR

Mast torque exceeds Reduce power or severity of manuever.


OVER TORQ 100.5% Land as soon as practical.

AHRS FAN Avoid prolonged ground run operations if


AHRS FAN inoperative OAT exceeds 40°C.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-7


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
ENGINE FIRES
Indications
FIRE 1 PULL or FIRE 2 PULL handle illuminated

Engine Fire During Start


Procedure
Abort the start of an affected engine as follows:

1. Throttle......................................................................................... CLOSED

2. FUEL XFEED Switch ........................................................ OVRD CLOSE

3. BOOST PUMP Switch......................................................................... OFF


EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

4. FUEL Switch........................................................................................ OFF

5. Appropriate FIRE
PULL Handle..................................................................................... PULL

6. FIRE EXT Switch............................................................................. MAIN

If FIRE warning annunciator remains on more than 10 seconds:

7. FIRE EXT Switch ...................................................................... RESERVE

8. Complete Engine Shutdown.

9. Exit Helicopter.

EP-8 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Engine Fire During Takeoff or Approach Procedure


If a landing site is available, begin approach; if not available, continue takeoff.

Indications
FIRE 1 PULL or FIRE 2 PULL handle illuminated

1. Airspeed .................................................................... 45 KIAS MINIMUM

2. Collective..................................................................................... REDUCE
(ALTITUDE PERMITTING)

3. Appropriate FIRE
PULL Handle..................................................................................... PULL
4. FIRE EXT Switch............................................................................. MAIN
If FIRE warning annunciator remains on more than 10 seconds:

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
5. FIRE EXT Switch ...................................................................... RESERVE
6. ENG .................................................................... SET AT 100% RPM (N2)
IF POSSIBLE
7. Land as soon as possible.
8. Complete engine shutdown.
9. Exit helicopter.

Engine Fire in Flight


Procedure
Initiate emergency descent immediately, if possible. Shut down affected en-
gine as follows:

1. Appropriate FIRE PULL Handle ...................................................... PULL


2. Throttle ........................................................................................ CLOSED
3. FIRE EXT Switch ............................................................................ MAIN

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-9


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

4. FUEL XFEED Switch ....................................................... OVRD CLOSE


5. BOOST PUMP Switch (affected engine)............................................. OFF
6. FUEL Switch (affected engine)............................................................ OFF
7. Fuel INTCON Switch ....................................................................... OPEN
If FIRE warning annunciator remains on more than 10 seconds:
8. FIRE EXT Switch ...................................................................... RESERVE
9. ENG (unaffected engine) ................................... SET AT 100% RPM (N2)
10. Land as soon as possible.
If a landing site is not readily available, proceed as follows:

NOTE
If reserve bottle has not been discharged.
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

12. FIRE PULL Handle ................................................................................ IN

Provides fire protection for unaffected engine.

13. GEN Switch (affected engine) ............................................................. OFF

If No. 2 engine was shut down:

14. BATTERY BUS 2 Switch ...................................................................... ON

15. BATTERY BUS 1 Switch ...................................................................... ON

16. NON-ESNTL BUS Switch ........................................................ MANUAL


AS DESIRED

After landing, proceed as follows:

17. Complete engine shutdown.

18. Exit helicopter.

EP-10 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

SMOKE OR FUMES IN CABIN


Indications
Smoke, toxic fumes, etc., in the cabin

Procedure
1. VENT BLOWER Switch ....................................................................... ON

2. Vents and Windows ........................................................................... OPEN

If additional ventilation is required:

3. Airspeed ........................................................................... REDUCE TO 60


KIAS OR LESS

4. Passenger Doors ................................................................................ OPEN

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
5. If time and altitude permit and the source is suspected to be electrical,
attempt to identify and isolate the affected system.

6. Land as soon as possible.

BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT FIRE


Indication
• BAGGAGE FIRE warning annunciator illuminates

Procedure
1. Reduce power to minimum required.

2. Land as soon as possible.

3. Inspect tailboom area for damage.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-11


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

ENGINE FAILURES
Single Engine Failure
ENG RPM (N 2 ) of the normally operating engine is allowed to droop to 97%
during transition from twin-engine operation to single engine operation. The
N 2 RPM should be increased to 100% if possible.

Flight can be continued on the remaining engine until a desirable landing site
is available. There are certain combinations of gross weight, altitude, and
cold ambient temperatures at which a single engine approach will result in the
OEI torque limit being exceeded. A run-on landing at 20 to 30 KIAS is rec-
ommended.

CAUTION
Run-on landings may result in roll oscillations while
on the ground. If this occurs, lowering collective
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

fully down or disengaging AP1 and AP2 will stop the


oscillations.

Loss of an engine while hovering at high gross weight and extremely cold
conditions will most likely result in exceeding the OEI torque limit. If an over-
torque is observed or suspected, an appropriate log book entry shall be made.
(See Performance charts in the Performance chapter.)

NOTE
If an engine restar t is to be attempted, refer to
ENGINE RESTART in the this section.

Indications
• ENG 1 OUT or ENG 2 OUT Warning annunciator illuminated

• GAS PROD below 53% RPM (N1) and decreasing

• ENG below 85% RPM (N2) and decreasing

• ITT below 400°C and decreasing

• ENG 1 or ENG 2 OIL PRESSURE, DC GENERATOR, and PART SEP


OFF caution lights illuminated

• Normal Engine N2 RPM droops to 97%

EP-12 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Procedure
WARNING

If corrective action is not initiated immediately,


ROTOR RPM could decay excessively.

CAUTION
During cold weather operations, carefully monitor
TORQUE of the normal engine when one engine fails
or is shut down in flight.

1. Collective..................................................................................... REDUCE

Reduce as required to maintain rotor rpm and power within OEI limits.

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
2. Airspeed ........................................................................................ 70 KIAS

70 KIAS or as required to maintain flight within OEI limits.

3. RPM Switch............................................................... INCR; SET N2 RPM


AT 100% IF POSSIBLE

4. Throttle (affected engine)............................................................. CLOSED

5. BOOST PUMP Switch


(affected engine)................................................................................... OFF

6. FUEL Switch (affected engine)............................................................ OFF

7. FUEL XFEED Switch ........................................................ OVRD CLOSE

8. Fuel INTCON Switch ....................................................................... OPEN

9. GEN Switch (affected engine) ............................................................. OFF

10. NON-ESNTL BUS Switch................................................... AS DESIRED

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-13


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

11. If No. 2 engine failed:

BATTERY BUS 2 Switch ...................................................................... ON

BATTERY BUS 1 Switch ...................................................................... ON

12. MASTER CAUTION annunciator ................................................. RESET

13. Altitude....................................................................... DESCEND BELOW


5,000 FEET HP
IF PRACTICAL

Descend to prevent possible fuel starvation if remaining boost pump fails.

14. Land as soon as practical.

Dual Engine Failure


EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

Indications
• ENG 1 OUT and ENG 2 OUT Warning Lights illuminated

• RPM Warning annunciator illuminated

• ROTOR RPM Audio on

• N1 RPM below 53% and decreasing (both engines)

• N2 RPM below 85% and decreasing (both engines)

• ITT below 400°C and decreasing (both engines)

• ENG 1 and ENG 2 OIL PRESSURE, DC GENERATOR, and PART SEP


OFF Caution Lights illuminated

Procedure

WARNING

If corrective action is not initiated immediately,


ROTOR RPM could decay excessively.

EP-14 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

1. Collective Pitch............................................................................ REDUCE

Establish autorotative glide at 65 to 90 KIAS.

NOTE
Airspeed for best angle of glide in autorotation is 90
KIAS, and airspeed for minimum rate of descent is
65 KIAS. Autorotational rate of descent is a function
of airspeed and ROTOR RPM and is virtually unaf-
fected by gross weight and density altitude.

2. Accomplish autorotative landing

If time permits before landing, and a restart will not be attempted, proceed
as follows:

3. Idle Stop Release switch (affected engine) ................................... SELECT

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
4. Throttles (both) ............................................................................ CLOSED

5. BOOST PUMP Switches (both)........................................................... OFF

6. FUEL Switches (both).......................................................................... OFF

7. FUEL TRANS Switches (both) ........................................................... OFF

After landing, complete shutdown.

Engine Compressor Stall


Indications
• Engine ‘pops’

• High or erratic ITT

• Decreasing or erratic N1 and N2 rpm

• Torque oscillations

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-15


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Procedure
1. Collective ............................................................... REDUCE, MAINTAIN
SLOW FLIGHT

2. Heater Switch......................................................................................... ON

3. ITT and N1.......................................................... CHECK FOR NORMAL


INDICATIONS

4. Land as soon as practical.

If an audible compressor stall is noted, refer to maintenance to determine cause.

TAIL ROTOR FAILURES


The key to successful handling of a tail rotor emergency lies in the pilot’s abil-
ity to quickly recognize the type of malfunction and to select the proper
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

emergency procedure. Following is a discussion of some types of tail rotor


malfunctions and their probable effects.

Complete Loss of Tail Rotor Thrust


Indications
This is a situation involving a break in the drive system, such as a severed drive-
shaft, wherein the tail rotor stops turning and delivers no thrust. A failure of this
type in a powered flight will result in the nose of the helicopter swinging to the
right (left side slip) and usually a roll of the fuselage. Nose down attitude will
also be present. The severity of the initial reaction will be affected by airspeed,
density altitude, gross weight, center of gravity, and power being used.

Loss of Tail Rotor Thrust at Hover


Procedure
Close throttles immediately and make a hovering autorotation landing. A
slight rotation can be expected on touchdown.

EP-16 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Loss of Tail Rotor Thrust in Climb


Indication
The degree of right yaw upon failure will be greater than that experienced in
level flight due to the higher power and anti-torque settings.

Procedure
Close throttles and lower collective pitch immediately. Establish a glide speed
slightly above normal autorotation approach speed.

If a turn is required to reach a more desirable place to land or to align into


the wind, make it to the right. A turn to the right can be more nearly stream-
lined by the use of a little power.

Once aligned for landing, yaw can be controlled in the following manner.

Right Yaw

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
If the nose yaws right with power off, a pulse of up-collective will produce
more friction in the mast thrust bearings, creating a left moment. The greater
the input of the pulse, the more the response will be.

WARNING

Do not allow ROTOR RPM to decay below minimum


limits.

Moving the collective upward abruptly increases rotor loading. Do not hold
the collective up, as rotor rpm will decrease lower than desirable. It is essential
that the collective be returned to the down position for autorotation. This cycle
is one pulse. The pulse should be rapid (up and down) but should not be used
at low altitudes.

Left Yaw
If the nose yaws left with the power off, a slight addition of power should ar-
rest it. Further increase in power results in more right yaw response.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-17


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Landing

CAUTION
Run-on landings may result in roll oscillations while
on the ground. If this occurs, lowering the collective
fully down or disengaging AP1 and AP2 will stop the
oscillations.

During the f inal stages of the approach, a mild flare should be executed and
all power to the rotor should be off. Maintain helicopter in a slight flare and
use the collective smoothly to execute a soft, slightly nose-high landing.
Landing on the aft portion of the skids will tend to correct side drift. This tech-
nique will, in most cases, result in a run-on type landing.

Zero Ground Speed Landing


EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

If it is essential that the landing be made at zero ground speed, the only
change in the technique described previously is that the flare should be exe-
cuted closer to the ground and more steeply. This will require a more rapid
forward cyclic input to land as near level as possible. A more positive and abrupt
use of collective will also be necessary.

CAUTION
The flare and the abrupt use of collective will cause
the nose to rotate left, b ut do not cor rect with
throttle. Although application of throttle will result in
rotation to the right, addition of power is a very strong
response measure and is too sensitive for the pilot to
manage properly at this time. Do not add power at
this time. Slight rotation upon touchdown at zero
ground speed should not cause any real problem.

Loss of T/R Thrust in Level Flight or Power Drive


Procedure
Close throttles and reduce the collective pitch immediately. Attain an airspeed
slightly above the normal autorotative glide speed.

If altitude permits with airspeed above 60 KIAS, throttle and pitch may be
gently applied to determine if some degree of powered flight can be resumed.
If unacceptable yawing is experienced, reenter autorotation and continue de-
scent to a landing.
The landing technique is the same as prescribed for the climb condition above.

EP-18 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Loss of Tail Rotor Thrust During Descent


(Low Power or Power Off)
Procedure
If both throttles are not closed at the time of the failure, close them. Proceed
as prescribed in the previous condition of level flight.

Loss of Tail Rotor Components


The loss of any tail rotor components will result in a forward center of
gravity shift. Other than additional nose down pitching, this situation would
be quite similar to complete loss of tail rotor thrust, as discussed above.

Tail Rotor Fixed Pitch Failures


Indications
Tail rotor pitch change control failures are characterized either by a lack of

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
directional response when a pedal is pushed or by locked pedals. If pedals can-
not be moved with a moderate amount of force, do not attempt to apply a max-
imum effort, since a more serious malfunction could result.

Fixed Pitch Failure at Hover


Procedure
Do not close throttles unless a severe right yaw occurs. If pedals lock in any
position at a hover, landing from a hover can be accomplished with greater
safety under power controlled flight rather than by closing throttles and
entering autorotation.

Fixed Pitch Failure in Flight


If tail rotor f ixed pitch failure occurs during climb (left pedal applied), cruise
(approximately neutral pedals), and descent (right pedal applied), a descent
and landing can be effected safely by use of power and throttle changes.

Procedure
If the helicopter is in a trimmed condition when the malfunction is discov-
ered, engine power and airspeed should be noted and the aircraft flown to a
suitable landing area.

Combinations of engine torque, rotor rpm, and airspeed will correct or ag-
gravate yaw attitude and these should be adjusted as required to control yaw
during landing.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-19


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Right Pedal Locked Forward of Neutral


Power should be reduced and ENG RPM (N 2 ) maintained within the green arc.
This will help streamline the helicopter in flight. Right turns are easier than
left turns. Airspeed should be maintained at or above 60 KIAS.

Execute a steep to normal approach, maintaining engine rpm and an airspeed


of about 60 knots during the initial part of the approach.

At 60 to 75 feet AGL and when the landing area can be made, start a slow de-
celeration to ar rive at the intended landing point with about 25 knots
indicated airspeed.

At 2 to 5 feet AGL, slowly reduce throttle to overcome yaw effect and allow
the helicopter to settle. When aligned with the landing area, allow helicopter
to touch down.

CAUTION
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

Run-on landings may result in roll oscillations while


on the ground. If this occurs, lowering the collective
fully down or disengaging AP1 and AP2 will stop the
oscillations.

After ground contact, use the collective and throttle as necessary to maintain
alignment with landing strip, and to minimize forward speed. If the helicopter
starts to turn, move the cyclic as necessary to follow the turn until the heli-
copter comes to a complete stop.

Left Pedal Locked Forward of Neutral


Reduce power and maintain ENG RPM (N 2) within the green arc. Normal turns
can be safely made under these conditions, although the nose may be displaced
to the left (depending on how far the pedal is forward) maintain about 60 knots
during the initial part of the approach. Execute a shallow to normal approach.

On f inal approach, reduce throttles to minimum operating rpm (97% N R ) and


simultaneously begin a slow deceleration so as to arrive at a point about two
to f ive feet above the intended touchdown area as effective translational lift
is lost.

Apply collective pitch (maintaining minimum operating rpm) to stop the rate
of descent and forward speed, and to align the helicopter with the intended
landing path. If not aligned after pitch application, increase throttle to further
help with alignment. Allow helicopter to touch down at near-zero ground speed,
maintaining alignment with the throttle.

EP-20 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Pedals Locked in Neutral


Reduce power and maintain ENG RPM (N 2) within the green arc. Normal turns
can be safely made under these conditions.

Execute a steep to normal approach, holding airspeed at 60 KIAS during the


initial part of the approach.

At 50 to 75 feet AGL and when the landing area can be made, start a slow
deceleration to arrive at the intended landing point with airspeed at 25 KIAS.

At 2 to 5 feet AGL, use throttle slowly as necessary to maintain alignment


with the landing area and to control yaw; do not allow the helicopter to settle
until alignment is assured, then touch down.

CAUTION
Run-on landings may result in roll oscillations while
on the ground. If this occurs, lowering the collective

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
fully down or disengaging AP1 and AP2 will stop the
oscillations.

After ground contact, use collective and throttle as necessary to minimize for-
ward speed and to maintain alignment. Move the cyclic as necessary to fol-
low the turn until the helicopter has come to a complete stop.

Loss of Pitch Change Control Linkage


Indications
In this type of failure, the pitch-change mechanism is broken at some point
and the tail rotor will assume a blade angle determined by the aerodynamic
and counterbalance forces.

Procedure
The corrective action procedures are described in Fixed Pitch Failures on
the previous page. The specif ic procedure to be used depends on the yaw
change experienced.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-21


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

MAIN DRIVESHAFT FAILURE

WARNING

Failure of the main driveshaft to the transmission will result


in complete loss of power to the main rotor. Although the cock-
pit indications for a driveshaft failure are somewhat comparable
to a dual engine failure, it is imperative that autorotative flight
procedures be established immediately. Failure to react im-
mediately to the low ROTOR RPM audio signal, warning an-
nunciator, and tachometer indication will result in loss of
control.
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

Indication
• Left yaw

• Rapid decrease in NR

• Rapid increase in N2

• Illumination of rotor RPM warning annunciator with audio

Possible increase in noise due to:

• Overspeeding engine turbines

• Overspeeding combining gearbox

• Driveshaft breakage

Procedure
1. Collective .......................................................................... AS REQUIRED

Establish autorotative descent.

2. Airspeed ................................................................................. ESTABLISH

Establish airspeed for minimum rate of descent or maximum glide.

EP-22 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

3. Throttles .................................................................................... CLOSE, IF


TIME PERMITS

4. Controls .................................................................... AS REQUIRED FOR


AUTOROTATIVE LANDING

MALFUNCTION PROCEDURES
ENGINE HOT START AND SHUTDOWN
Indications
A hot start is caused by a combination of excessive fuel in the combustion chamber
and delayed fuel ignition. Internal and external damage can result.
• Flames emitting from the exhaust

• Excessive ITT indication

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
Procedure
1. Throttles.............................................................................. CLOSE; KEEP
STARTER ENGAGED

2. BOOST PUMP Switch......................................................................... OFF

3. FUEL Switch........................................................................................ OFF

4. Starter............................................................ CONTINUE TO ENERGIZE


UNTIL ITT DECREASES

5. Complete shutdown.

6. Exit helicopter and check for damage.

If ITT limits for starting were exceeded, an appropriate entry shall be made
in the helicopter log book. The entry shall state which limit was exceeded,
the duration of time, the extreme value attained, and any additional information
essential in determining the maintenance action required. Refer to the Engine
Maintenance Manual for inspection requirements.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-23


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

ENGINE RESTART IN FLIGHT


The conditions which would warrant an attempt to restart the engine would
probably be a flameout, caused by a malfunction of the automatic mode of
the fuel control unit. The decision to attempt an engine restart during flight
is the pilot’s responsibility.

Procedure

CAUTION
If the cause of engine failure is obviously mechani-
cal, as evidenced by abnormal sounds, do not attempt
a restart.

1. Throttle (affected engine)............................................................. CLOSED


EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

2. BOOST PUMP Switch


(affected engine) .................................................................................... ON

3. FUEL Switch (affected engine) ............................................................. ON

4. FUEL XFEED Switch


(affected engine) .............................................................................. NORM

5. GOV Switch (affected engine) ................................................... MANUAL

6. GEN Switch (affected engine) ............................................................. OFF

CAUTION
OEI performance can be affected during generator as-
sisted start (with both battery switches on).

For battery start (nonassisted):

7. BATTERY BUS Switch


(normal engine) .................................................................................... OFF

8. BATTERY BUS Switch


(affected engine) .................................................................................... ON

EP-24 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

9. START Switch............................................................................. ENGAGE

Observe Starter Limitations.

10. Engine Oil Pressure ................................................ INDICATING A RISE

CAUTION
When restarting engine in manual fuel control mode,
carefully monitor ITT.

11. Throttle ............................................................................. OPEN SLOWLY


AT 12% N1 RPM

Open Slowly until ITT begins to rise. Do not open throttle further until
ITT and N1 rpm stabilize.

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
12. START Switch .................................................................. CENTERED AT
55% N1 RPM

CAUTION
When operating in manual fuel control mode, make
slow, smooth throttle movements to avoid compres-
sor stall, overtemp, overspeed, and possible drive
train damage. Coordinate throttle and collective pitch
changes to avoid overloading the normal engine.

13. Throttle ................................................................... INCREASE SLOWLY;


ADJUST AS REQUIRED

Adjust to control torque, ITT, and N1 rpm.

NOTE
If torque of affected engine is controlled slightly
(approximately 4%) below torque of normal engine,
rotor rpm will be governed within limits automati-
cally by normal engine.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-25


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

14. GEN Switches (both)............................................................................. ON

15. BATTERY BUS 2 Switch ...................................................................... ON

16. FUEL TRANS Switch


(affected engine) .................................................................................... ON

17. FUEL INTCON Switch................................................................... NORM

18. Land as soon as practical.

If restart was unsuccessful, secure affected engine as prescribed in Single


Engine Failure procedure.

ENGINE FUEL CONTROL MALFUNCTIONS


Components of each engine fuel control system subject to malfunction are
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

the manual fuel control unit, the automatic fuel control unit (containing the
gas producer turbine governor), the power turbine governor, and the torque
control unit. In-flight determination of which component has malfunctioned
is virtually impossible and is irrelevant to the required corrective action. The
pilot, therefore, is tasked with interpreting the abnormal indications only so
far as to determine which engine has been affected, and which way, in order
to perform the proper corrective action.

The primary indications of a fuel control failure usually will be a TORQUE


split and an accompanying increase or decrease in POWER TURBINE RPM
(N 2 ) and ROTOR RPM (N R ) from the selected or governed value. The indi-
cations on the torquemeter, gas producer (N 1 ), and ITT gages alone will not
distinguish a high side failure from a low side failure. The triple tachometer
must be checked for high or low N 2 /N R indications.

The indications of a high side or a low side fuel control failure will vary in
accordance with the specif ic cause of failure and the total power demand at
the time of failure.

EP-26 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Engine Underspeed
NOTE
Normal deviations of ROTOR RPM from the governed
setting may occur when large collective changes are
made but should not be confused with fuel control fail-
ure, unless a large steady-state TORQUE split occurs.

If there is a low power demand (less than single engine power available) at
the time of low side failure, ROTOR RPM and N 2 of the affected engine will
decrease and stabilize at or slightly below the governed value. TORQUE, ITT
and N 1 of the affected engine will also decrease. As ROTOR RPM decreases,
the normal engine will increase TORQUE output to assume the load. If power
demand is near zero, there may not be a signif icant torque split.

If there is a high power demand (greater than single engine power available)
at the time of low side failure, ROTOR RPM will decrease along with N 2 ,
TORQUE, ITT, and N 1 of the affected engine. As ROTOR RPM decreases,

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
the normal engine will increase to maximum power to assume the load,
causing signif icant increases in TORQUE, ITT and N 1 , while N 2 will remain
below the governed value.

Indications
• Low N2 and rotor rpm (possibly with RPM warning annunciator and audio
if power demand is in excess of single engine power available)

• Torque split (proportional to power demand)

• Low N1, ITT and torque on affected engine

Procedure
WARNING

If corrective action is not initiated immediately,


ROTOR RPM could decay excessively.

1. Collective................................................................................ ADJUST AS
NECESSARY
Adjust to maintain ROTOR RPM.

2. Airspeed ........................................................................................ 70 KIAS

3. Affected Engine ........................................................................ IDENTIFY

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-27


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

4. Throttle Frictions ................................................................. TIGHTEN ON


NORMAL ENGINE;
REDUCE ON
AFFECTED ENGINE

5. Throttle (affected engine) ...................................................... REDUCE TO


IDLE STOP

6. GOV Switch (affected engine) ................................................... MANUAL

CAUTION
When operating in manual fuel control mode, make
slow, smooth, coordinated throttle and collective
movements to avoid compressor stall, overtemp, un-
derspeed/overspeed, and possible drive train dam-
age. Coordinate throttle and collective pitch changes
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

to avoid overloading the normal engine.

7. Throttle (affected engine) ....................................... INCREASE SLOWLY;


ADJUST AS REQUIRED

Adjust throttle and collective as required to maintain torque of affected


engine slightly below torque of normal engine.

8. MASTER CAUTION annunciator ................................................. RESET

9. Land as soon as practical.

Engine Overspeed—Fuel Control/Governor Failure


NOTE
Normal deviations of ROTOR RPM from the governed
setting may occur when large collective changes are
made but should not be confused with fuel control fail-
ure, unless a large steady-state TORQUE split occurs.

If there is a low power demand (less than single engine power available) at
the time of high side failure, ROTOR RPM and N 2 of the affected engine will
increase considerably above the governed value. TORQUE, ITT and N 1 of the
affected engine will also increase. As N 2 and ROTOR RPM increase above
the governed value, the normal engine will reduce power to keep itself from
overspeeding, and will indicate significantly lower TORQUE, ITT and N 1 than
the affected engine.

EP-28 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

If there is a high power demand (greater than single-engine power available)


at the time of high side failure, ROTOR RPM and N 2 of the affected engine
will surge initially, along with TORQUE, ITT and N 1 . As N 2 and ROTOR RPM
increase, the normal engine will reduce power to keep itself from over-
speeding. The affected engine then tries to assume all of the load, which is
beyond its capability, due to the high power demand. N 2 of the affected en-
gine (and ROTOR RPM) will then decrease and rejoin the N 2 of the normal
engine, stabilizing at or slightly above the governed value as the normal en-
gine adjusts power output to share the load.

Indications
• High N2 and ROTOR RPM (NR), possibly with RPM caution annunciator.

• Definite TORQUE split (proportional to power demand)

• High N1, ITT and TORQUE on affected engine

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
• Return of N2 and ROTOR RPM to governed value (if power demand is
very high)

Procedure

CAUTION
If corrective action is not initiated immediately,
ROTOR RPM could overspeed excessively.

1. Collective ........................................................ ADJUST AS NECESSARY


TO MAINTAIN ROTOR RPM

2. Affected Engine ........................................................................ IDENTIFY

3. Throttle (affected engine) ................................. REDUCE TO MAINTAIN


TORQUE AT OR SLIGHTLY BELOW
TORQUE OF NORMAL ENGINE

If affected engine does not respond to throttle inputs:

4. Throttle Frictions.............................. TIGHTEN ON NORMAL ENGINE;


REDUCE ON AFFECTED ENGINE

5. Throttle (affected engine) ...................................................... REDUCE TO


IDLE STOP

6. GOV Switch (affected engine) ................................................... MANUAL

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-29


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

CAUTION
When operating in manual fuel control mode, make
slow, smooth, coordinated throttle and collective
movements to avoid compressor stall, overtemp, un-
derspeed/overspeed, and possible drive train dam-
age.

7. Throttle (affected engine) ....................................... INCREASE SLOWLY;


ADJUST AS REQUIRED

Adjust throttle and collective as required to maintain torque of affected


engine slightly below torque of normal engine.

8. MASTER CAUTION annunciator ................................................. RESET


EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

CAUTION
If N R or MAST TORQUE exceeds 110% or overspeed
values are unknown, land as soon as possible.

9. Land as soon as practical.

Governor Actuator Failure (Full Increase)


Indications
• N2 and ROTOR RPM increase to approximately 101%

• RPM INCR–DECR switch inoperative

Procedure
If this failure occurs during takeoff or landing, no immediate corrective ac-
tion is necessary to complete either maneuver.

As soon as practical, roll back both throttles to maintain 97 to 100% N 2 RPM.


Further adjustment of collective and throttles simultaneously will allow full
power at pilot’s discretion.

Land as soon as practical.

Governor Actuator Failure (Full Decrease)


Published Flight Manual performance may not be attainable.

EP-30 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

ELECTRICAL POWER FAILURES


DC Power Failure
Indications
• DC GENERATOR caution annunciator illuminates

• All lighting and avionics on the nonessential buses inoperative

Procedure
1. All unnecessary equipment .................................................................. OFF

2. GEN FIELD and GEN RESET circuit breakers....................... CHECK IN

3. GEN Switch (affected generator) ................................................... RESET,


THEN ON

If a generator remains inoperative proceed as follows:

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
3. GEN Switch (affected generator)......................................................... OFF

If No. 2 generator failed:

4. BATTERY BUS 2 Switch..................................................................... OFF

5. BATTERY BUS 1 Switch ...................................................................... ON

6. NON-ESNTL BUS Switch ........................................................ MANUAL

7. DC AMPS ................................................................................. MONITOR

If load exceeds limit:

8. NON-ESNTL BUS Switch................................................... AS DESIRED

Switch off unnecessary equipment as required

9. DC AMPS ....................................................................... MONITOR AND


MAINTAIN BELOW
CONTINUOUS LIMIT

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-31


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

If both generators fail and neither will reset, proceed as follows:

CAUTION
Do not select EMERG LOAD at pressure altitudes
above 5,000 feet. Both fuel boost pumps will become
inoperative, resulting in possible fuel starvation.

8. EMERG LOAD Switch ........................................................ AS DESIRED

NOTE
A fully charged battery will provide suff icient elec-
trical power for approximately 30 minutes with
essential equipment operating normally except for
limitations as follows:
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

VHF Comm #1—Transmit 3 minutes, receive 30 min-


utes.
Pitot-Static Heaters—7 1/2 Minutes.
Utility Light (overhead portable)—3 minutes.
Search Light—2 minutes.
Windshield Wipers—2 minutes.
With emergency load switch in EMERG LOAD po-
sition, battery will provide approximately 76 minutes
of electrical power.

9. Land as soon as practical.

AC Power Failure
Indications
• INVERTER 1 or 2 caution annunciator illuminates

• Possible loss of power to certain AC instruments (with no INVERTER


caution annunciator)

EP-32 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Procedure
If either INVERTER caution annunciator illuminates, proceed as follows:

1. AC VOLTS..................................................................................... CHECK

Check to determine that remaining inverter has assumed all AC loads.

2. INV PWR Circuit Breakers ...................................................... CHECK IN

3. AP1 or AP2 Button


(affected system)........................................................................ PRESS TO
REENGAGE
AUTOPILOT

If power is lost only to certain AC instruments, but INVERTER caution lights


remain out, proceed as follows:

1. AC FEEDERS Circuit

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
Breakers (8 each) ...................................................................... CHECK IN

During IFR flight, if both inverters fail, land as soon as practical, or continue
flight under VFR, if desired.

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FAILURE


This helicopter has two independent hydraulic boost systems, both of which
supply power to the flight control system for the main rotor. The tail rotor con-
trol system is powered by system 1 only.

If a hydraulic system failure occurs shortly after the helicopter has been cold
soaked at or below –25°C (–13°F) and the center of gravity of the helicopter
is near the forward or aft limit, some resistance may occur when the cyclic is
near control position extremes. This resistance can be overcome by increased
pilot effort.

Indications
• NO. 1 or NO. 2 HYDRAULIC caution annunciator illuminates

• Abnormal (low, high, or fluctuating) hydraulic pressure in affected system

• Possible high temperature in affected system

• Increased pedal forces (if system 1 failed)

• Increased cyclic forces near control extremes (cold weather only)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-33


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Procedure
If either hydraulic systems fails, or if system temperature or pressure exceeds
limits, proceed as follows:

NOTE
Do not extend flight with failed hydraulic system. The
helicopter is not controllable with both hydraulic
systems inoperative.

NOTE
During cold weather operation avoid high rates of
climb. Make approaches and landings into the wind.
Avoid extended hovering and do not hover with the
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

wind coming from the aft left quadrant.

1. Affected system......................................................................... IDENTIFY


POSITIVELY

2. HYDR SYS Switch


(affected system) .................................................................................. OFF

3. N2 RPM................................................................................ SET TO 100%

4. MASTER CAUTION annunciator ................................................. RESET

5. Land as soon as possible.

COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FAILURES


Intercom Failure
Indication
Weak or no reception in headsets

Procedure
1. Check headset connection.

2. Verify volume and ICS controls set properly.

3. Cycle ICS circuit breaker out and in.

EP-34 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

For single pilot operations only with Emergency Communications Panel in-
stalled:

4. Plug headset into EMERGENCY COMM jack (above and behind pilot
position).

5. Select desired radio on copilot ICS panel.

6. Key selected radio with EMERGENCY COMM switch (on center


pedestal).

Communication Radio Failure


Indication
Weak or no reception in headsets

Procedure

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
1. Verify proper radio selected.

2. Verify volume properly adjusted.

3. Verify frequency properly set.

4. Check headset connection.

5. Cycle appropriate circuit breaker out and back in.

CABIN HEATER MALFUNCTION


A malfunction in the bleed-air heater controls may or may not cause heater
to become inoperative.

Indications
HEATER AIR LINE caution annunciator illuminates

Heated air flow does not shut off when thermostat knob is turned to full
cold position

Procedure
1. HEATER Switch ...................................................... OFF IMMEDIATELY

2. CABIN HTR Circuit Breaker......................................... CHECK; IF OUT,


DO NOT RESET

3. Check prior to next flight.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-35


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

FUEL SYSTEM FAILURES


Fuel Boost Pump Failure
Indication
NO. 1 or NO. 2 FUEL BOOST caution annunciator illuminates

Procedure

NOTE
If either BOOST PUMP fails, usable fuel will be ap-
proximately 60 pounds less than indicated.

If practical, descend below 5,000 feet H P to prevent possible fuel starvation


in the event remaining boost pump fails.
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

1. FUEL INTCON Switch .................................................................... OPEN

NOTE
If FUEL XFEED switch is in NORM position, cross-
feed valve will be automatically opened allowing the
remaining pump to supply fuel to both engines.

2. Land as soon as practical.

Fuel Filter Partially Blocked


1. Land as soon as practical.

Fuel Quantity Indications Malfunction


Indication
One fuel quantity indicator goes to zero from a previously normal condition.
(Possible power failure to the respective fuel signal conditioner. The digital
indicator will read half total quantity.)

Power loss to both signal conditioners will give a zero quantity indication.

NOTE
A power failure to the signal conditioner will disable
the FUEL LOW caution panel indication and alter the
FUEL TRANS caution indication for affected fuel sys-
tem. Refer to Table EP-2.

EP-36 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Procedure
1. FUEL QTY circuit breaker ....................................................... RECYCLE
AFFECTED SIDE

2. FUEL INTCON Switch .................................................................... OPEN

NOTE
Allow suff icient time for fuel levels to equalize.
A p p r o x i m a t e f u e l l o a d s m ay b e o b t a i n e d by
doubling remaining fuel quantity indicated.

STATIC PORT OBSTRUCTION


Indication
Erratic readings from the AIRSPEED indicator, VERTICAL SPEED
indicator, and altimeter when operating helicopter in rain with the STATIC

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
SOURCE switch in PRI position

Procedure
1. Windows and vents ...........................................................................CLOSE

2. HEATER Switch ....................................................................................OFF

3. STATIC SOURCE Switch...................................................................ALTN

NOTE
This procedure selects an alternate static source
(cabin air) for pilot side instruments only.

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM


AFCS MALFUNCTIONS
Automatic flight control system (AFCS) can be affected by malfunctions of
any vertical gyros, yaw rate gyros, (AHRS for S/N 36248 and subsequent),
inverters, accelerometers (4 axis only), or by other electrical malfunctions.
Failure of No. 1 hydraulic system will render AFCS yaw axis inoperative but
will not affect pitch or roll SAS or ATT mode functions. Failure of No. 2
hydraulic system will not affect AFCS.

Digital AFCS fault codes will be displayed on the AL-300 Air Data Display.
Table EP-3 lists error codes and descriptions.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-37


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Table EP-3. DIGITAL AFCS ERROR CODES

PWR PRE CONT AL-300 ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION


UP FLT TEST DISPLAY
X X X E0 LOST PROCESSOR
X X X E1 RAM PARTITION FAIL
X E2 INSTRUCTION SET FAIL
X E3 REGISTER TEST FAIL
X X X E4 RAM RD/WR FAIL
X X X E5 EPROM CHECKSUM FAIL
X X E6 CPU FAIL
X X X E7 D/A-A/D FAIL
X E8 INTERRUPT REG FAIL
X E9 +15V MONITOR FAIL (POSSIBLE
HARDWARE E/A FAIL)
X E10 –15V MONITOR FAIL
X E11 +5V MONITOR FAIL
X E12 +10V MONITOR FAIL
X E13 LVC MONITOR FAIL
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

X E14 SAWTOOTH MONITOR FAIL


X E15 ACTUATOR REFERENCE MONITOR FAIL
X E16 WATCHDOG MONITOR FAIL
X X X E17 TICKET FAILURE
X E18 LVC FAIL
X E19 SAWTOOTH FAIL
X E20 ACTUATOR REFERENCE FAIL
X E21 WATCHDOG FAIL
X E25 TRIM END AROUND FAIL
X E26 TRMMON CKSUM FAIL
X E28 NO ROLL TRIM
X E29 NO PITCH TRIM
X E31 ROLL TRIM FAIL
X E32 PITCH TRIM FAIL
X E34 ROLL TRIM RUNAWAY
X E35 PITCH TRIM RUNAWAY
X E36 TRMRUN CKSUM FAIL
X E38 YAW SERIES SERVO FAIL
X E39 ROLL SERIES SERVO FAIL
X E40 PITCH SERIES SERVO FAIL
X E42 VG MISCOMPARE
X E55 ERROR CODE STORAGE ALERT:<100
AVAILABLE
X E56 ERROR CODE STORAGE ALERT: NONE
AVAILABLE
X E101 PITCH ARL TEST FAIL
X E102 ROLL ARL TEST FAIL
X E103 PITCH ACT MOVED DURING ARL TEST
X E104 ROLL ACT MOVED DURING ARL TEST
X E105 PITCH TRIM ACT MOVED
X E106 ROLL TRIM ACT MOVED
X E110 NO ROLL TRIM
X E111 NO PITCH TRIM
X E113 ROLL TRIM BACKWARDS

EP-38 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Table EP-3. DIGITAL AFCS ERROR CODES (CONT)

PWR PRE CONT AL-300 ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION


UP FLT TEST DISPLAY
X E114 PITCH TRIM BACKWARDS
X E115 SERVO VALID DELAY (2 SEC) FAIL
X E116 WATCHDOG CANNOT DISENGAGE AP
X E117 YAW ACT/SERVO AMP FAIL
X E118 ROLL ACT/SERVO AMP FAIL
X E119 PITCH ACT/SERVO AMP FAIL
X E121 FD ANN FAIL
X E124 FD ANN FAIL OTHER
X E125 POD DURING TEST
X E126 ROD DURING TEST
X E129 FTR DURING TEST
X E131 TRIM SWITCH OFF DURING TEST
X E133 PITCH TRIM ACT MOVED
X E134 ROLL TRIM ACT MOVED
X E136 PITCH TRIM ACT MOVED

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
X E137 ROLL TRIM ACT MOVED
X E139 YAW SERIES ACT MOVED
X E141 PITCH TRIM (H) E/A ON
X E142 PITCH TRIM (L) E/A ON
X E143 ROLL TRIM (H) E/A ON
X E144 ROLL TRIM (L) E/A ON
X E147 TRIM ENABLE FAIL
X E148 TRIM ONE-SHOT FAIL
X E149 PITCH TRIM (H) E/A OFF
X E150 PITCH TRIM (L) E/A OFF
X E151 ROLL TRIM (H) E/A OFF
X E152 ROLL TRIM (L) E/A OFF
X E155 SERVO VALID FAIL
X E156 TRIM END AROUND FAIL
X E157 APON OTHER INPUT FAIL
X E201 AL-300 KNOB MOTION
X E204 ANALOG GROUND FAIL
X E208 ROLL ATTITUDE MORE THAN 10 DEG
X E209 PITCH ATTITUDE MORE THAN 10 DEG
X E210 YAW RATE GYRO MORE THAN 10 DEG/
SEC
X E211 DIRECTIONAL GYRO FAIL
X E212 VERTICAL GYRO NOT VALID
X E213 DIRECTIONAL GYRO NOT VALID
X E216 SERIAL I/O NOT VALID
X E217 OTHER AUTOPILOT NOT IN TEST
X E219 AP CONTROLLER BUTTON(S) PRESSED
X E221 HARDWARE NOT VALID
X E222 FOUR-WAY BEEP SWITCH PRESSED
X E225 POD DURING TEST
X E226 ROD DURING TEST
X E229 FTR DURING TEST
X E231 TRIM SWITCH OFF DURING TEST

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-39


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Table EP-3. DIGITAL AFCS ERROR CODES (CONT)

PWR PRE CONT AL-300 ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION


UP FLT TEST DISPLAY
X E233 ENG TORQUE LESS THAN 5% OR
GREATER THAN 30%
X E234 ENG TEMP LESS THAN 150 DEG OR
GREATER THAN 900 DEG C
X E236 AIRSPEED INPUT OPEN
X E237 HEADING NOT VALID
X E241 C/A RESET BUTTON PRESSED
X E244 ERASE EEPROM SWITCH ON DURING
TEST
X E245 READ EEPROM SWITCH ON DURING
TEST
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

If both autopilots are disengaged, the following procedures do not apply.

NOTE
If both autopilots are disengaged, the following pro-
cedures do not apply.

AFCS Fails to Engage or Disengages


Indications
NO. 1 Autopilot and NO. 2 Autopilot caution annunciator illuminated

AP1 or AP2 off (button not illuminated)

Error code(s) displayed on AL-300. If more than one error exists, the AL-
300 will continuously scroll through all error codes.

Possible erratic API indications on AP1 or AP2

Possible ATT FAIL flag displayed on pilot or copilot ADI

Possible illumination of INVERTER 1 or 2 caution annunciator

EP-40 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

NOTE
If inverter 1 or 2 fails, AP1 or AP2 will disengage,
but can be reengaged by pressing the respective but-
ton on the AFCS control panel.

Procedure
1. Airspeed ......................................................................... REDUCE TO 115
KIAS OR LESS

2. Maintain straight and level flight attitude to allow AHRS to realign.


Verify AHRS alignment complete.

3. INV 1 and 2 Switches ............................................................................ ON

Check No. 1 and No. 2 INVERTER caution lights extinguished.

4. Pilot and Copilot’s ADIs ................................................................ CHECK

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
Check that ATT FAIL flags are retracted and indicators are functioning
properly.

5. Check the following circuit breakers are in:

NOTE
Do not attempt to reset any circuit breaker more
than once.

a. INV 1 PWR and INV 2 PWR


b. AC FEEDERS (8)
c. NO. 1 and NO. 2 ESNTL BUS FEEDERS (on main DC)
d. AFCS (No. 1 and No. 2)
e. AFCS 26.5V (No. 1 and No. 2)
f. PILOT ATT SYS and CPLT ATT SYS

g. PILOT AHRS and COPILOT AHRS 28VDC (S/N 36248 and


subsequent)

h. No. 1/No. 2 ATTD—26VAC—Check/Reset

6. AP1 or AP2 button (affected system)........................................ PRESS TO


REENGAGE

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-41


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

If either autopilot will not reengage, or if abnormal control disturbance oc-


curs, proceed as follows:

7. Affected Autopilot ................................................................ DISENGAGE

8. Airspeed ...................................................................... MAINTAIN AT OR


BELOW 115 KIAS

9. If IFR, land as soon as practical; or continue flight under VFR, if desired.

10. If fault cannot be cleared, use error code displayed on AL-300 to


determine failed axis. Refer to Table EP-3 for a list of error codes.

If both autopilots fail to reengage, proceed as follows:

11. If IFR, land as soon as practical; or continue flight under VFR, if desired.
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

AFCS Fails to Hold Attitude


Procedure
1. FORCE TRIM Switch............................................................. CHECK ON

2. SAS/ATT Button...................................... CHECK ATT ANNUNCIATOR


ILLUMINATED

If autotrim caution annunciator illuminated, follow procedure for AFCS


Fails to Engage or Disengages.

AFCS Hardover or Abnormal Control Disturbance


Procedure

NOTE
If AP1 or AP2 fails or is disengaged, reduce airspeed
to 115 KIAS or less.

1. Cyclic FORCE TRIM


Release Switch................................................................................. PRESS

Cor rect helicopter attitude with cyclic and pedals, then release
switch.

EP-42 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

2. Airspeed ......................................................................... REDUCE TO 115


KIAS OR LESS

3. Actuator Position Indicators............................................... CHECK BOTH


SYSTEMS

If any API shows maximum displacement or erratic operation of any


actuator, switch affected autopilot OFF.

4. If IFR, land as soon as practical; or continue flight under VFR, if desired.

Autotrim Failure
Indication
AUTOTRIM caution annunciator illuminates

Error code(s) displayed on AL-300 (ADC). If more than one error exists,

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
the AL-300 will continuously scroll through all error codes

Procedure
1. Ensure cyclic friction set at minimum.

2. Attempt to reset AUTOTRIM annunciator by cycling either AP1 or AP2


OFF, then ON.

3. If fault condition cannot be cleared, use error code displayed on AL-300 to


determine failed axis. Refer to Table EP-3 for a list of error codes.

NOTE
If AUTOTRIM caution annunciator illuminates and
no error codes are displayed on the AL-300 (ADD),
then either or both autopilot computers may be in AOG
mode. AOG mode inhibits the autotrim and attitude
hold junctions. This note does not apply to Flight
Director equipped helicopters.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-43


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Pitch or Roll Failure


Pilot may choose to remain in ATT mode, using cyclic FORCE TRIM release
switch and APIs to manually re-trim as required to keep actuators working
near center; or pilot may select SAS mode with FORCE TRIM switch ON or
OFF as desired.

Autotrim Runaway
An autotrim runaway can occur only when both AP1 and AP2 are on in ATT mode.

Indications
An autotrim runaway in flight will be evidenced by the cyclic stick being driven
in a direction opposite to the actuator position indications (AP1 or AP2). This
condition occurs because the series actuators will be driven to limit author-
ity to compensate for the autotrim runaway. When the actuators are saturated
(on stops), the helicopter will respond to the runaway trim command; how-
ever, with both AP1 and AP2 operative, the autotrim will be cut off auto-
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

matically two seconds after actuator saturation.

Procedure
1. Cyclic FORCE TRIM Release Button.............. DEPRESS AND RETRIM

Depress to center actuators and retrim to desired attitude.

2. Airspeed ......................................................................... REDUCE TO 115


KIAS OR LESS

3. AP2 or AP1 .......................................................................................... OFF

4. APIs.................................................................................. MONITOR FOR


PROPER OPERATION

5. If IFR, land as soon as practical; or continue flight under VFR, if desired.

EP-44 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

ATTITUDE HEADING REFERENCE SYSTEM


(AHRS)

AHRS ALIGNMENT (S/N 36248 AND SUBSEQUENT)

Prior to Flight
NOTE
Depending on procedures performed during the start
sequence, the HSI heading OFF flag may not retract
at end of AHRS alignment phase.

Indications
ADI ATT flag retracted and HSI heading OFF flag in view.

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
Procedure
1. Perform manual AHRS heading synchronization procedure by selecting
MAG/DG switch from MAG to DG to MAG positions.

2. Confirm HSI heading OFF flag retracted and heading display accurate.

In Flight
NOTE
During in-flight realignment in turbulent conditions,
prolonged invalid heading data may result despite
valid attitude data. Refer to Manual AHRS Heading
Synchronization.

A power loss of 0.5 seconds or more will require realignment of AHRS.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-45


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Indications
ATT, RT, or HDG fail flag displayed on pilot or copilot ADI/HSI

No. 1 or No. 2 AUTOPILOT—Disengaged—Caution annunciator


illuminated.

Error Code(s) displayed on AL-300. If more than one error exists, the AL-
300 will continuously scroll through all error codes.

Possible erratic API/HSI/ADI indication

AUTOMATIC AHRS REALIGNMENT


Procedure
1. Airspeed ............................................................... REDUCE TO 115 KIAS
OR LESS
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

2. Affected Autopilot.............................................. VERIFY DISENGAGED

3. Unaffected Autopilot ................................................ VERIFY ENGAGED

4. Pilot/Copilot AHRS 28VDC


Circuit Breaker ............................................................ CHECK IN/RESET

5. No. 1/No. 2 ATTD 26VAC Circuit Breaker


Release Switch ............................................................ CHECK IN/RESET

6. Maintain unaccelerated straight and level flight for a minimum of 30


seconds for AHRS to realign. Verify AHRS alignment complete.

MANUAL AHRS HEADING SYNCHRONIZATION


Procedure
1. Pilot/copilot AHRS..................................... 28VDC CIRCUIT BREAKER
CHECK IN

2. Pilot/copilot HSI ....................................... 115VAC CIRCUIT BREAKER


CHECK IN

3. MAG/DG Mode Switch—While in straight and level flight, switch to DG


position, then return to MAG position. Verify AHRS alignment complete.

EP-46 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

AHRS FAILS TO REALIGN


Indications
• Failed systems do not realign

• HSI and ADI do not function properly

• Either autopilot will not reengage

• Abnormal control disturbances

Procedure
1. Airspeed ........................................................... AT OR BELOW 115 KIAS

2. Affected Autopilot.............................................. VERIFY DISENGAGED

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
3. Unaffected Autopilot ................................................ VERIFY ENGAGED

4. If IFR, land as soon as practical; or continue under VFR.

NOTE
If fault condition cannot be cleared, use error code
display on AL-300 to determine failed axis. Refer to
Table 3-3 for a list of error codes.

STICK CENTERING INDICATOR FAILURE


Indication
• CYC CTR caution lights fail to illuminate when cyclic is displaced 1.5
inches or more from the center position while RPM caution annunciator is
illuminated

Procedure
1. Maintain ROTOR between 97 and 100% RPM for ground operation
before beginning ENGINE shutdown procedures.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY EP-47


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

LIMITATIONS
CONTENTS
Page
GENERAL OPERATING LIMITATIONS ............................... LIM-1
Basis of Certif ication ............................................................. LIM-1
Type of Operation ................................................................... LIM-1
Required Equipment—AFCS ................................................ LIM-1
Required Equipment—IFR .................................................... LIM-1
Optional Equipment................................................................ LIM-2
DOORS OPEN OR REMOVED................................................. LIM-2
WEIGHT AND CG LIMITATIONS .......................................... LIM-3
Weight Limits .......................................................................... LIM-3
Longitudinal Center-of-Gravity Limits ............................... LIM-3
Lateral Center-of-Gravity Limits ......................................... LIM-3
LOADING LIMITATIONS ......................................................... LIM-3
Passenger Loading .................................................................. LIM-3
Internal Cargo Loading .......................................................... LIM-5
CLIMB AND DESCENT LIMITATIONS ................................ LIM-5
ALTITUDE LIMITATIONS ....................................................... LIM-5
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS ................ LIM-7
HEIGHT-VELOCITY LIMITATIONS ..................................... LIM-7
LIMITATIONS
LIMITATIONS

MANEUVERING LIMITATIONS ............................................ LIM-7


SLOPE LANDING LIMITATIONS .......................................... LIM-7
ELECTRICAL LIMITATIONS.................................................. LIM-9
Battery Limitations................................................................. LIM-9
Generator Limitations ............................................................ LIM-9
Engine Starter Limitations .................................................. LIM-10
Ground Power Starts ............................................................ LIM-10
HEATER ..................................................................................... LIM-10
ROTOR BRAKE LIMITATIONS ............................................ LIM-10

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY LIM-i


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

FUEL AND OIL LIMITATIONS ............................................ LIM-10


Fuel ......................................................................................... LIM-10
Engine and Combining Gearbox Oil.................................. LIM-11
Transmission, Intermediate and Tail Rotor Gearbox ...... LIM-11
HYDRAULIC LIMITATIONS................................................. LIM-11
ENGINE RESTART LIMITATIONS ...................................... LIM-12
ENGINE TORQUE LIMITATIONS ....................................... LIM-12
Twin-Engine Operation ....................................................... LIM-12
AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS ..................................................... LIM-12
AREAS, DIMENSIONS, WEIGHTS AND CAPACITIES.. LIM-16
Airframe ................................................................................. LIM-16
Main Rotor............................................................................. LIM-16
Tail Rotor ............................................................................... LIM-17
Engine .................................................................................... LIM-17
Transmission Rating ............................................................ LIM-17
Weights................................................................................... LIM-17
Fuel ......................................................................................... LIM-18
Engine Oil .............................................................................. LIM-18
Transmission Oil................................................................... LIM-18
Usable Cubage ...................................................................... LIM-18
Cargo Door Opening ............................................................ LIM-18
HOIST PENALTY REGION.................................................... LIM-20
LIMITATIONS

AHRS ALIGNMENT ................................................................ LIM-20


LIMITATIONS

POWERPLANT LIMITATIONS ............................................. LIM-22


ALTITUDE ................................................................................. LIM-22
MAST TORQUE........................................................................ LIM-22
Twin-Engine Operation ....................................................... LIM-22

LIM-ii FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

ILLUSTRATIONS

Figure Title Page


LIM-1 Gross Weight Center-of-Gravity Charts ................... LIM-4
LIM-2 W-A-T Limitations for Takeoff .................................. LIM-6
LIM-3 Height-Velocity Diagram (OEI) ................................. LIM-8
LIM-4 Max Speed-Sideward and Rearward Flight ............ LIM-13
LIM-5 Placards and Decals ................................................... LIM-15
LIM-6 Inspection and Servicing .......................................... LIM-19
LIM-7 C.G. Envelope for Hoist Operations ....................... LIM-21
LIM-8 Placards and Decals ................................................... LIM-23
LIM-9 Instrument Markings ................................................. LIM-24

LIMITATIONS
LIMITATIONS

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY LIM-iii


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

LIMITATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS


GENERAL OPERATING LIMITATIONS
Compliance with the limitations in this section is required by appropriate
operating rules.

BASIS OF CERTIFICATION
This helicopter is certif ied under FAR Part 29, Category “A” and “B.”

TYPE OF OPERATION
The basic conf igured helicopter is approved as a f ifteen-place helicopter and
is certif ied for operation under day or night VFR and IFR non-icing condi-
tions.

REQUIRED EQUIPMENT—AFCS
AFCS shall be disengaged or operated in SAS mode during prolonged ground
operation, except as required for AFCS check.

Digital AFCS preflight test (level 1 minimum) shall be accomplished prior


to f irst flight of the day or before planned flight into IMC.

REQUIRED EQUIPMENT–IFR
• Both autopilots, AP 1 and AP 2, shall be engaged in ATT mode dur-
LIMITATIONS

ing flight
LIMITATIONS

• Heated pitot-static system

• Pilot windshield wiper

• Two VHF communications radios

• Two navigation receivers with auxiliary equipment appropriate to in-


tended IFR route of flight

• DME equipment

• ATC transponder

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY LIM-1


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

• Marker beacon receiver

• 3-inch standby attitude indicator

• Pilot IVSI

• Force trim

• Roof window blackout curtains

• EMERGENCY COMM panel (if installed) (single pilot only)

Digital AFCS preflight test (level 1 minimum) shall be accomplished prior


to f irst flight of the day or before planned flight into IMC.

OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Refer to appropriate Flight Manual supplement(s) for additional limitations,
procedures, and performance data with optional equipment installed.

DOORS OPEN OR REMOVED


Helicopter may be flown with doors open or removed only with Bell Standard
Interior (412-705-501) or Bell Deluxe Interior (412-705-500) installed. Flight
operation is approved for following alternative conf igurations during VFR
conditions only:

Symmetrical conf igurations:

• Both crew doors removed.

• Both sliding doors locked open or removed with both hinged panels
LIMITATIONS

installed or removed.
LIMITATIONS

Asymmetrical conf igurations:

• Cargo doors can be opened or closed asymmetrically, to a locked po-


sition, with following restrictions:

• Two way communications between pilot and cabin crew member.

• All crew members and passengers are secured with an approved


restraint.

NOTE
Opening or removing doors shifts helicopter center-
of-g ravity and reduces V NE . Refer to the RFM,
Manufacturer’s Data, and to Airspeed Limitations.

LIM-2 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

WEIGHT AND CG LIMITATIONS


WEIGHT LIMITS
Maximum g ross weight for takeoff and landing is 11,900 pounds (5,398
kilog rams).

Refer to Weight-Altitude-Temperature Limitations chart (Figure LIM-2) for


maximum allowable weight for takeoff, landing, and IGE hover operation.

The minimum gross weight for flight is 6,400 pounds (2,903 kilograms).

The minimum combined crew weight at fuselage station 47.0 is 170


pounds (77.1 kilog rams).

LONGITUDINAL CENTER-OF-GRAVITY LIMITS


Longitudinal center-of-gravity limits vary from station 130 to 144, depending on
gross weight. Refer to the Gross Weight Center-of-Gravity Chart (Figure LIM-1).

LATERAL CENTER-OF-GRAVITY LIMITS


Lateral center-of-gravity limitations are 4.5 inches (114.3 millimeters) left
and right of the fuselage centerline for all gross weights.

LOADING LIMITATIONS
NOTE
Refer to the Weight and Balance section of the
Manufacturer’s Data for loading tables to be used in
weight/CG computations.
LIMITATIONS
LIMITATIONS

PASSENGER LOADING
The outboard facing seats should not be occupied unless at least four of the
forward or aft facing passenger seats are occupied.

The above loading procedure does not apply if cargo or a combination of cargo
and passengers are being transported. It shall then be the pilot’s responsibil-
ity to ensure that the helicopter is properly loaded so that the entire flight is
conducted within the limits of the Gross Weight Center-of-Gravity Charts
(Figure LIM-1).

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY LIM-3


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

13,000

135.1 141.4
12,000 11,900

11,000
GROSS WEIGHT—LB

10,000

9,000
8,800 FORWARD LIMIT AFT LIMIT

8,000

7,000

6,400
130.4 MINIMUM WEIGHT
6,000
130 132 134 136 138 140 142 144
LONGITUDINAL C.G. FUSELAGE STA.—IN.
ENGLISH UNITS

5,800
5,600
3,432 3,592
5,400 5,398
5,200
GROSS WEIGHT—KILOGRAMS

5,000
4,800
LIMITATIONS

4,600
LIMITATIONS

4,400
4,200
3,992 FORWARD LIMIT AFT LIMIT
3,800
3,600
3,400
3,200
3,000 2,948
2,800 2,903
3,312 MINIMUM WEIGHT 3,658
2,600
3,250 3,300 3,350 3,400 3,450 3,500 3,550 3,600 3,650
LONGITUDINAL C.G.~FUSELAGE STA.—MM.
METRIC UNITS

Figure LIM-1. Gross Weight Center-of-Gravity Charts

LIM-4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

INTERNAL CARGO LOADING


The maximum allowable deck loading for cargo is 100 pounds per square foot
(4.9 kg/100 sq cm). Deck mounted cargo tiedown f ittings are provided and
have an airframe structural capacity of 1,250 pounds (567.0 kilograms) ver-
tical and 500 pounds (226.8 kilograms) horizontal per f itting. Provisions for
installation of cargo tiedown f ittings are incorporated in the aft cabin bulk-
head and transmission support structure and have an airframe structural ca-
pacity of 1,250 pounds (567.0 kilograms) at 90 degrees to the bulkhead and
500 pounds (226.8 kilograms) in any direction parallel to the bulkhead. Cargo
shall be secured by an approved restraint method that will not impede access
to the cargo in the event of an emergency.

A second crewmember is required if cargo consists of flammable materials.


Second crewmember shall have access throughout cabin to perform duties of
f ire f ighting and ventilating the cabin to remove smoke and toxic fumes in
event of emergency. Approved protective breathing equipment is required for
each crewmember when transporting flammable cargo in cabin.

Baggage compartment has a load limit of 400 pounds (181 kilograms), not to
exceed 100 pounds per square foot (4.9 kg/100sq cm).

CLIMB AND DESCENT LIMITATIONS


The maximum IFR rate of climb or descent is 1,000 feet per minute.

The maximum IFR approach slope is 5 degrees.

ALTITUDE LIMITATIONS
The maximum operating pressure altitude is 20,000 feet (6,096 meters).

The maximum density altitude for takeoff, landing, and in-ground-effect ma-
LIMITATIONS

neuvers is 14,000 feet (4,267 meters). Refer to the Weight-Altitude-Temperature


LIMITATIONS

Limitations Chart (Figure LIM-2).

Above 15,000 feet (4,572 meters) pressure altitude, restart shall be attempted
in manual fuel control mode only.

Below 15,000 feet (4,572 meters) pressure altitude, restart may be attempted
in either manual or automatic fuel control mode.

NOTE
Refer to applicable operating rules for high altitude
oxygen requirements.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY LIM-5


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

WEIGHT—ALTITUDE—TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS
FOR TAKEOFF, LANDING AND IN-GROUND EFFECT MANEUVERS
NOTE: ALLOWABLE GROSS WEIGHTS OBTAINED
FROM THIS CHART MAY EXCEED CONTINUOUS
HOVER CAPABILITY UNDER CERTAIN AMBIENT
CONDITIONS. REFER TO HOVER CEILING CHARTS
IN SECTION 4.
14,000 FT.
DEN. ALT. LIMIT
000
14,
000
12,

MAXIMUM
GROSS WEIGHT
000

LIMIT
10,

MAX OAT
00
8,0
00
6,0

MIN
OAT
00
4,0

FT.
0

E—
0
LIMITATIONS

2,0
LIMITATIONS

D
TU
L
EVE
LTI
AL
EA
SE
UR
S
ES
PR

10,900 LB

11.9

–40 –20 0 20 40 60 9 10 11 12 LB X 1000


CONDITIONS: OAT — °C
OAT—28° C 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.4 KG X 1000
PA—4,000 FT

Figure LIM-2. Weight-Altitude-Temperature Limitations for Takeoff,


Landing, and In-Ground-Effect Maneuvers

LIM-6 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS


The maximum sea level ambient air temperature for operation is +51.7°C
(+125°F) and decreases with pressure altitude at the standard lapse rate of
2°C (3.6°F) per 1,000 feet (305 meters) to 20,000 feet (6,096 meters).

Minimum ambient temperature for operation at all altitudes with engine oil
pressure/temperature indicator 209-070-262-113 installed is –40°C (–40°F).

The minimum ambient temperature for operation at all altitudes with en-
gine oil pressure/temperature indicator 209-070-262-109 installed is –34°C
(–30°F).

NOTE
During extremely cold ambient temperatures, idle
rpm will be high and the ENGINE OIL pressure
may exceed maximum limits for up to two minutes
after starting.

NOTE
Either engine oil pressure/temperature gage shall be
installed in pairs.

HEIGHT-VELOCITY LIMITATIONS
The height-velocity limitations are critical in the event of single engine fail-
ure during takeoff, landing, or other operation near the surface (Figure LIM-
3). The AVOID area of the Height-Velocity diagram def ines the combinations
of airspeed and height above ground from which a safe single engine land-
ing on a smooth, level, f irm surface cannot be assured.
LIMITATIONS
LIMITATIONS

The Height-Velocity diagram is valid only when the Weight-Altitude-


Temperature limitations are not exceeded (Figure LIM-2). The diagram does
not def ine the conditions which assure continued flight following an engine
failure nor the conditions from which a safe power-off landing can be made.

MANEUVERING LIMITATIONS
Aerobatic maneuvers are prohibited.

SLOPE LANDING LIMITATIONS


Slope landings are limited to side slopes not to exceed 10 degrees.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY LIM-7


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

HEIGHT-VELOCITY DIAGRAM
FOR SMOOTH, LEVEL, FIRM SURFACES

400 120
AND ABOVE
NOTE HELICOPTER CONFIGURATION AND ABOVE
380 SHALL COMPLY WITH THE WEIGHT-
375 114.3
ALTITUDE-TEMPERATURE LIMITS AS
360 PRESENTED IN FIGURE 5-1 FOR HEIGHT- 110
VELOCITY DIAGRAM TO BE VALID.
340
100
320

300 90
280

SKID HEIGHT ABOVE SURVACE—METERS


80
SKID HEIGHT ABOVE SURVACE—FEET

260

240
70
220

200 60

180

160 50

140
40
LIMITATIONS

120
LIMITATIONS

100 30

80
20
60

40
10
20 4.9
16
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 VNE
INDICATED AIRSPEED—KNOTS
Figure LIM-3. Height-Velocity Diagram (OEI)

LIM-8 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

ELECTRICAL LIMITATIONS
BATTERY LIMITATIONS
The maximum battery case temperature is 54.5° C (130° F), as indicated
by illumination of the BATTERY TEMP warning light.

WARNING

The battery shall not be used for engine start after


illumination of BATTERY TEMP light. The bat-
tery shall be removed and serviced in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions prior to return to
service.

The minimum ambient temperature for battery start when battery and
helicopter have been cold soaked is –25° C (–13° F).

GENERATOR LIMITATIONS
• Continuous operation — 0 to 75 amps

• Caution — 75 to 150 amps

NOTE
During OEI operation electrical loads may have to
be reduced to remain below maximum continuous
limits.

• Maximum continuous — 150 amps (each)


LIMITATIONS
LIMITATIONS

NOTE
T h e a m m e t e r n e e d l e m ay d e f l e c t f u l l s c a l e
momentarily during generator-assisted start of the
second engine.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY LIM-9


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

ENGINE STARTER LIMITATIONS


Starter energizing times shall be limited as follows:

• 30 seconds ON

• 60 seconds OFF

• 30 seconds ON

• 5 minutes OFF

• 30 seconds ON

• 15 minutes OFF

GROUND POWER STARTS


28-VDC ground power units for starting shall be limited to 1,000 amps maximum.

HEATER
Heater shall not be operated when OAT is above 21° C (69.8° F).

ROTOR BRAKE LIMITATIONS


Engine starts with rotor brake engaged are prohibited. Rotor brake applica-
tion is limited to ground operation and shall not be applied until both engines
are shut down and rotor rpm has decreased to 40% N R or below.

FUEL AND OIL LIMITATIONS


NOTE
Refer to Manufacturer’s Data, Section 4, for lists of
LIMITATIONS
LIMITATIONS

approved fuels, oils, and vendors.

FUEL
Fuel conforming to ASTM D-1655 Type B, NATO F-40, or MIL-T-5624 Grade
JP-4 may be used at all ambient temperatures.

Fuel conforming to ASTM D-1655 Type A or A-1, NATO F-44, MIL-T-5624


Grade JP-5 NATO F-34, or MIL-T-8 3133, Grade JP-8, limited to ambient tem-
perature above –30° C (–22° F).

LIM-10 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

ENGINE AND COMBINING GEARBOX OIL


Oil conforming to PWA Specif ication No. 521 Type I and MIL-L-7808 may
be used at all ambient temperatures.

Oil conforming to PWA Specification No. 521 Type II and MIL-L-23699 (NATO
O-156), or DOD-L-85734 as limited to ambient temperatures above
–40° C (–40° F).

TRANSMISSION, INTERMEDIATE AND TAIL ROTOR


GEARBOX OIL
Oil conforming to DOD-L-85734AS (Turbine Oil 555), MIL-L-23699 (NATO
O-156), or MIL-L-7808 may be used at all approved ambient temperatures.

NOTE
DOD-L-85734AS or MIL-L-23699 is recommended.

HYDRAULIC LIMITATIONS
NOTE
Refer to RFM-Manufacturer’s Data, Section 4 for
approved fluids and vendors.

Hydraulic fluid type MIL-H-5606 (NATO H-515) shall be used at all ambi-
ent temperatures.

Both hydraulic systems shall be operative prior to takeoff. LIMITATIONS

WARNING
LIMITATIONS

The helicopter is not controllable with both hydraulic


boost systems inoperative.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY LIM-11


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

ENGINE RESTART LIMITATIONS


Above 15,000 feet (4,572 meters) pressure altitude, restart shall be attempted
in manual fuel control mode only.

Below 15,000 feet (4,572 meters) pressure altitude, restart may be attempted
in either manual or automatic fuel control mode.

ENGINE TORQUE LIMITATIONS


TWIN-ENGINE OPERATION
The maximum allowable engine torque differential is 4% during normal op-
eration. Refer to the Transmission Torque Limits.

AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS
The minimum IFR airspeed is 60 KIAS.

Basic V NE is 140 KIAS from sea level to 3,000 feet density altitude at all
gross weights. V NE decreases for ambient conditions in accordance with
airspeed limitations placard (Figure LIM-5).

The airspeed shall not exceed 105 KIAS (or placard V NE , if less) when op-
erating above maximum continuous transmission torque of 81%.

V NE with only one autopilot engaged is 115 KIAS (or placarded V NE , if less).
If both autopilots are disengaged, basic V NE applies.

V NE , for steady state autorotation, is:


• 105 KIAS at or below 10,000 feet (3,048 meters) pressure altitude.
LIMITATIONS

• 80 KIAS above 10,000 feet (3,048 meters) pressure altitude.


LIMITATIONS

V NE with doors open or removed is 60 KIAS with energy attenuating pas-


senger seats installed.

V NE with doors symmetrically open or removed is 100 KIAS with Bell


Helicopter Installed Blanket Interior (412-705-501) or Deluxe Interior
(412-705-500).

The maximum allowable airspeed for sideward or rearward flight at or below


3,000 feet HD is 35 knots. (See Figure LIM-4 for additional limitations.)

The maximum allowable tailwind or crosswind speeds for hover opera-


tions at or below 3,000 feet HD is 35 knots. (See Figure LIM-4 for ad-
ditional limitations.)

LIM-12 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

14,000 FT DENSITY ALTITUDE


LIMITED FOR IGE MANEUVERS
14,000

12,000
DENSITY ALTITUDE—FEET

10,000
WIND LIMIT

8,000

6,000

4,000

2,000
LIMITATIONS

0
LIMITATIONS

14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38

MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE WINDSPEED—35 KNOTS

Figure LIM-4. Maximum Speed-Sideward and Rearward Flight,


Crosswind and Tailwind at a Hover (Sheet 1 of 2)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY LIM-13


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

OGE

30°
SEE
NOTE
1

270° 90°
95°

SEE
180°
NOTE
2

NOTES:
1. PEDAL CRITICAL WIND AZIMUTH—HOVERING WITH THE RELATIVE
WIND WITHIN THESE AZIMUTH ANGLES CAN RESULT IN THE FOLLOWING:
A. INABILITY TO MAINTAIN HEADING DUE TO LARGE LEFT PEDAL
REQUIREMENTS FOR CERTAIN WIND VELOCITIES.
B. REDUCTION OF AVAILABLE LEFT PEDAL CONTROL WITH A
DIRECTIONAL AFCS HARDOVER.
2. LONGITUDINAL CYCLIC CRITICAL WIND AZIMUTH—AFT CYCLIC MAY BE
LIMITED WITH LONGITUDINAL AFCS HARDOVER.

IGE 45°
LIMITATIONS
LIMITATIONS

SEE
NOTE
1
270° 90°

105°

SEE 180°
NOTE
2

Figure LIM-4. Maximum Speed-Sideward and Rearward Flight,


Crosswind and Tailwind at a Hover (Sheet 2 of 2)

LIM-14 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BASIC FUEL CAP DO NOT APPLY ROTOR BRAKE
2148 LBS ABOVE 40% RPM
WITH AUX FUEL KIT
PRESSURE ALTITUDE IN FTX11,000 412-706-007
OAT 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 3212 LBS
°C
INDICATED VNE KNOTS 412-706-009
2389 LBS
51.7 137 — — — — — — — — — — TWIN & 30 MIN OEL 100 8%
40 140 134 128 122 — — — — — — — 2 1/2 MIN OEL 102.4%
DO NOT OPERATE
20 140 139 133 127 121 115 109 103 97 — —
HEATER ABOVE 21
0 140 140 140 133 127 121 115 109 103 96 91 DEG C OUT AIR TEMP
–10 140 140 140 140 131 124 118 112 106 100 94
–20 140 140 140 138 133 127 121 115 108 102 96
–30 140 139 134 129 124 120 115 110 106 101 97 THIS HELICOPTER MUST BE OPERATED
IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE OPERATING
–40 134 129 124 120 116 111 107 102 98 94 90
LIMITATIONS SPECIFIED IN THE FAA
AUTOROTATION VNE 85 KIAS ABOVE 10,000 FT. APPROVED ROTORCRAFT FLIGHT MAN
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


IN ALTN POSITION MAINTAIN INSTRUMENT ACCURACY BY
CLOSING WINDOWS AIRVENTS AND TURNING HEATER OFF

Figure LIM-5. Placards and Decals

LIM-15
LIMITATIONS
LIMITATIONS
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

V NE with cargo doors opened asymmetrically is 80 KIAS.

V NE with cargo doors in transit or in an unlocked position is 60 KIAS.

V NE with doors symmetrically open or removed is 60 KIAS with Bell


Helicopter installed energy attenuating passenger seats (412-706-002).

NOTE
Asymmetric door conf iguration is not authorized
with energy attenuating seats installed.

Refer to the Critical Relative Wind Azimuths diagram in Section 4 of the RFM.

AREAS, DIMENSIONS, WEIGHTS


AND CAPACITIES
AIRFRAME
Overall length (rotor turning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 ft 2 in.

Fuselage length (tail rotor horizontal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 ft 11 in.

Width (rotor folded) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 ft 4 in.

Height (tail rotor horizontal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 ft 5 in.

Landing gear tread (no load) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ft 8 in.

MAIN ROTOR
LIMITATIONS

Number of blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
LIMITATIONS

Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 ft

Chord (equivalent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ft 2 in

Disc area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,662 sq ft

Airfoil section:

At tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8%

At root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23%

LIM-16 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Engine-to-rotor gear ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.38:1

Tip speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780 ft/sec

RPM 100% (6,600 engine rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 rpm

TAIL ROTOR
Number of blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ft 7 in.

Chord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5 in.

Disc area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57.8 sq ft

Tip speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 ft/sec

RPM 100% (6,600 engine rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,660 rpm

ENGINE
Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pratt and Whitney of Canada, Ltd.

Model number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PT6T-3B

Single-engine 2.5-minute power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,025 shp

Single-engine 30-minute power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970 shp

Output (100%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6,600 rpm

TRANSMISSION RATING
LIMITATIONS
LIMITATIONS

Maximum continuous power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,134 shp

Takeoff 5-minute power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,400 shp

WEIGHTS
Standard conf iguration (approximate empty weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6,425 lb

Maximum gross weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,900 lb

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY LIM-17


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

FUEL
Capacity:

Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 U.S. gal

ENGINE OIL
Capacity:

Each engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 U.S. gal

Combining gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25 U.S. gal

Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.45 U.S. gal

TRANSMISSION OIL
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.75 U.S. gal

CARGO AREA

Length (overall) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 ft 8 in.

Width (floor level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ft

Height (maximum) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ft 4 in.

USABLE CUBAGE
LIMITATIONS
LIMITATIONS

Main cargo space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 cu ft

Left side copilot/passenger seat space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 cu ft

Baggage compartment space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 cu ft

CARGO DOOR OPENING


Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ft 7 in.

Width (with hinged panel open) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 ft 8 in.

Height above ground (approximate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ft 6 in.

LIM-18 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

SYSTEM MATERIAL

FUEL TURBINE FUEL JP-4


JP-5
JP-8

ENGINE OIL, Lubricating Oil:


LEFT AND RIGHT MIL-L-7808
POWER SECTIONS, MIL-L-23699
AND COMBINING DOD-L-85734 AS
GEARBOX

TRANSMISSION OIL Lubricating Oil:


MIL-L-7808
MIL-L-23699
DOD-L-85734 AS

INTERMEDIATE Lubricating Oil:


GEARBOX MIL-L-7808
MIL-L-23699
DOD-L-85734 AS

TAIL ROTOR Lubricating Oil:


GEARBOX MIL-L-7808
MIL-L-23699
DOD-L-85734 AS

HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS Hydraulic Fluid:


MIL-L-5606

ROTOR BRAKEHydraulic Fluid:


LIMITATIONS

MIL-L-5606
LIMITATIONS

BATTERY Servicing by qualified


battery shop only

ENGINE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Nitrogen and Freon


(PORTABLE EXTINGUISHERS)
(Monobromotrifluoromethane)

Figure LIM-6. Inspection and Servicing

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY LIM-19


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

HOIST PENALTY REGION


Pilot shall know C.G. at time of hoist operation to determine if C.G. is within
penalty region of Hoist C.G. envelope (Figure LIM-7).

Each hoist operation performed is def ined as an extension and retraction of


hoist cable while hovering with any weight attached.

Refer to BHT-412-FMS-7 or BHT-412-FMS-26 for Bell Helicopter approved


Hoists.

WARNING

THIS PENALTY IS VALID FOR ALL HOIST IN-


STALLATIONS.

OPERATION IN PENALTY REGION AFFECTS


AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS OF ROTOR
COMPONENTS (REFER TO BHT-412-MM).

LIMITATIONS OF ROTOR COMPONENTS (REFER


TO BHT-412-MM).

AHRS ALIGNMENT
To perform in-flight/shipboard AHRS alignment, the following conditions must
be met:

Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Less than ±10°

Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Less than ±5°


LIMITATIONS

Yaw Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Less than 1°/sec


LIMITATIONS

Lateral and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Less than 0.05g


Longitudinal Acceleration

For a minimum of 30 seconds for attitude and heading to become valid.

LIM-20 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


132
(3353)
133
(3378) PENALTY
REGION
134
(3404)
135
(3529)
136
(3454)
137
(3480)
138
(3605)
139
(3531)
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

140
(3556)
VNE FOR HOIST OPERATIONS—60 KIAS
141

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


(3556)

FUSELAGE STATION—INCHES (MILLIMETERS)


142
(3607)
143
(3632)
–7 –6 –5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(–178) (–152) (–127) (–102) (–76) (–51) (–25) (0) (25) (51) (76) (102) (127) (152) (178)
LATERAL—INCHES (MILLIMETERS)

LIM-21
Figure LIM-7. Longitudinal/Lateral C.G. Envelope for Hoist Operations

LIMITATIONS
LIMITATIONS
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

POWERPLANT LIMITATIONS
• Pratt and Whitney Aircraft of Canada, Ltd. PT6T-3D

NOTE
Operation in 2 1/2 -minute or continuous OEI range is
intended for emergency use only, when one engine be-
comes inoperative due to an actual malfunction.

Any time an engine is operated in an OEI range, an entry shall be made in the
helicopter logbook detailing the extent of operation in excess of twin-engine
takeoff power limits. This does not apply to approved ITT limits for starting.

ALTITUDE
NOTE
Refer to applicable operating rules for high altitude
oxygen requirements.

Maximum operating pressure altitude is 20,000 feet (6,096 meters).

Maximum density altitude for takeoff, landing, and in-ground-effect ma-


neuvers is 14,000 feet (4,267 meters). Refer to Weight-Altitude-Temperature
Limitations chart (Figure LIM-2, General Limitations section).

Above 15,000 feet (4,572 meters) pressure altitude, restart shall be attempted
in manual fuel control mode only.

Below 15,000 feet (4,572 meters) pressure altitude, restart may be attempted
in either manual or automatic fuel control mode.
LIMITATIONS
LIMITATIONS

MAST TORQUE
TWIN-ENGINE OPERATION
Maximum continuous .....................................................................................81%
Takeoff range (5 minutes maximum) ...............................................81 to 100%
Maximum .......................................................................................................100%

LIM-22 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

WARNING

Takeoff power shall not be used above 105 KIAS.

CAUTION
When operating near the maximum mast torque limit,
inadvertent overtorque may occur during maneuver-
ing flight conditions involving turns and/or nose
down attitude changes. Decrease power to 90% mast
torque prior to maneuvering helicopter.

Intentional use of mast torque over 100% is prohibited.

TWIN 103.1% CONTINUOUS


2.5 MIN OEI 109.2% OEI 103.7%

NOTE:
OTHER PLACARDS AND DECALS COMMON
TO ALL BHT MODEL 412's ARE LISTED ON
PAGE LIM-14, GENERAL LIMITATION SECTION.
LIMITATIONS

Figure LIM-8. Placards and Decals


LIMITATIONS

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY LIM-23


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

AIRSPEED
0
140 20
0 TO 30 KNOTS INDICATOR UNRELIABLE

30 TO 140 KNOTS CONTINUOUS OPERATION


AIRSPEED
120 40 105 KNOTS MAXIMUM FOR AUTO-
ROTATION AT OR BELOW
KNOTS 10,000 FT (3048M) HP
USE ON
100 BELL 412 ONLY
140 KNOTS VNE
60
80

TRIPLE TORQUE INDICATOR


TRANSMISSION (TWIN ENGINE OPERATION)
11 10
10 9 10 TO 81% CONTINUOUS OPERATION
9 8
8 7 81 TO 100% 5-MINUTE TAKEOFF RANGE
TORQUE
7 6 100% MAXIMUM
MAST ENG 5
6
2

ENGINE (ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE)


1

5 4 5 TO 73.2% CONTINUOUS OEI OPERATION


% x 10
4 3
73.2 TO 81% 2 1/2-MINUTE OEI RANGE
3 2
2 1 81% MAXIMUM OEI
1

TRIPLE TACHOMETER
ROTOR RPM (NR)

26 TO 77% TRANSIENT GROUND OPERATION

80% MINIMUM FOR AUTOROTATION


ENG
LIMITATIONS

0 10
BELOW 8,000 LB (3,629 KG)
LIMITATIONS

120 GROSS WEIGHT


20 80 TO 91% POWER OFF OPERATION
110 ROTOR
BELOW 8,000 LB (3,629 KG)
30 GROSS WEIGHT
100 91 TO 104.5% CONTINUOUS OPERATION
R

(91% MINIMUM POWER OFF)


PERCENT
RPM
40 104.5% MAXIMUM
90
80 50 ENGINE RPM (NII)

70 60 97% MINIMUM

97 TO 100% CONTINUOUS OPERATION

100 TO 104.5% OPERATION AT OR BELOW


30% ENGINE TORQUE
104.5% MAXIMUM AT OR BELOW
30% ENGINE TORQUE

Figure LIM-9. Instrument Markings (Sheet 1 of 4)

LIM-24 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

GAS PRODUCER RPM (NI)


9
0
1
12% MINMUM FOR OPENING THROTTLE
8 2 1 DURING START
7 3% X 10 61% FLIGHT IDLE RPM
6 4 RPM 2
5

10 3 61 TO 103.1% CONTINUOUS OPERATION

9 4 103.1% MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS


8 5 103.1 TO 103.7% CONTINUOUS OEI
7 6 103.1 TO 109.2% 21/2-MINUTE OEI
103.7% MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS OEI

109.2% MAXIMUM 21/2-MINUTE OEI

TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE


15 TO 110°C CONTINUOUS OPERATION

110°C MAXIMUM
15 10
10 OIL 8
6 TRANSMISSION OIL PRESSURE
5
0
T °C
X 10
PSI
P 2
4 30 PSI MINIMUM FOR FLIGHT IDLE
–5 0 30 TO 40 PSI FLIGHT IDLE RANGE

40 TO 70 PSI CONTINUOUS OPERATION

70 PSI MAXIMUM

LIMITATIONS
LIMITATIONS

FUEL PRESSURE
40 50 4 PSI MINIMUM
30 FUEL 4 TO 35 PSI CONTINUOUS OPERATION
PSI
20 35 PSI MAXIMUM
10 0

Figure LIM-9. Instrument Markings (Sheet 2 of 4)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY LIM-25


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE


0°C MINIMUM

0 TO 115°C CONTINUOUS OPERATION

115°C MAXIMUM FOR MIL-L-7808 OIL


15 15
10 OIL 120°C MAXIMUM FOR MIL-L-23699 OR
10 DOD-L-85734 OIL
5
T
0
°C
X 10
PSI
P 5 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
–5 0
40 PSI MINIMUM FOR FLIGHT IDLE

40 TO 80 PSI OPERATION BELOW 79% NI RPM

80 TO 115 PSI CONTINUOUS OPERATION

115 PSI MAXIMUM

COMBINING GEARBOX OIL TEMPERATURE


0°C MINIMUM

0 TO 115°C CONTINUOUS OPERATION

115°C MAXIMUM FOR MIL-L-7808 OIL


15 10
10 OIL 8 120°C MAXIMUM FOR MIL-L-23699 OR
6
5
0
T °C
X 10
PSI
P 2
4
DOD-L-85734 OIL

COMBINING GEARBOX OIL PRESSURE


–5 0
40 PSI MINIMUM FOR FLIGHT IDLE

40 TO 60 PSI OPERATION BELOW 94% N2 RPM

60 TO 80 PSI CONTINUOUS OPERATION


LIMITATIONS
LIMITATIONS

80 PSI MAXIMUM

Figure LIM-9. Instrument Markings (Sheet 3 of 4)

LIM-26 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

3 3 AMMETER
AMPS 2 0 TO 75 AMPS CONTINUOUS OPERATION
2
1 2 75 TO 150 AMPS CAUTION
1 1
X100 150 AMPS MAXIMUM
0 0

INTERTURBINE TEMPERATURE (ITT)


300 TO 810°C CONTINUOUS OPERATION

810°C MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS


EI
O 9 10
ITT 3 810 TO 925°C OEI OPERATION
4
8 820°C MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS OEI
5
°C X 100 6
925°C MAXIMUM 21/2-MINUTE OEI
7 MAXIMUM TRANSIENT-TWIN ENGINE
(5 SECONDS MAXIMUM ABOVE 810°C)

1090°C MAXIMUM FOR STARTING


(2 SECONDS MAXIMUM ABOVE 960°C)

HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE


88°C MAXIMUM
15 15
10 OIL HYDRAULIC OIL PRESSURE
10
LIMITATIONS

5
T °C PSI
P 600 PSI MINIMUM
LIMITATIONS

0 5
X 10 600 TO 900 PSI CAUTION
–5 0
900 TO 1100 PSI CONTINUOUS OPERATION

1100 PSI MAXIMUM

Figure LIM-9. Instrument Markings (Sheet 4 of 4)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY LIM-27


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

WEIGHT AND BALANCE


CONTENTS

Page

GENERAL ..................................................................................... WB-1


CENTER OF GRAVITY (CG) .................................................... WB-3
Empty Weight CG ............................................................... WB-3
Gross Weight CG ................................................................ WB-3
CG LIMITATIONS ....................................................................... WB-3
Calculating Helicopter CG ............................................... WB-3
Doors Open or Removed ................................................... WB-8
Optional Equipment and Kits ........................................... WB-8
LOADING THE HELICOPTER ................................................. WB-9
Cockpit and Cabin Loading .............................................. WB-9
Baggage Compartment Loading .................................... WB-11
Fuel Loading ..................................................................... WB-11
SAMPLE LOADING PROBLEM ............................................ WB-16
WEIGHT AND BALANCE COMPUTATION (LONG.)...... WB-18
WEIGHT AND BALANCE COMPUTATION (LAT.) .......... WB-18
WEIGHT AND BALANCE

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY WB-i


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

ILLUSTRATIONS

Figure Title Page


WB-1 CG Reference Datum Lines ......................................... WB-2
WB-2 CG Limits ....................................................................... WB-4
WB-3 Actual Weight Record .................................................. WB-5
WB-4 Internal Fuel Tank Station Location ........................ WB-15

TABLES

Table Title Page


WB-1 Door Weights and Moments......................................... WB-8
WB-2 Pilot and Passenger Table of Moments ...................... WB-9
WB-3 Internal Cargo Loading .............................................. WB-10
WB-4 Baggage Loading ........................................................ WB-12
WB-5 Fuel Loading................................................................ WB-13
WB-6 Fuel Loading - Lateral ............................................... WB-14
WB-7 Required Equipment List........................................... WB-19
WEIGHT AND BALANCE

WB-ii FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

WEIGHT AND BALANCE


GENERAL
Proper weight and balance control to ensure that the helicopter CG is within
prescribed limits is essential. Failure to load the helicopter so that it is within
CG limits and then maintain helicopter CG within allowable limits during flight
may result in insuff icient control capability and unsafe flight conditions.

Helicopter CG limits, both longitudinal and lateral, are provided in Section


1, Limitations, of the RFM. Section 1, Weight and Balance, of the RMD pro-
vides all necessary instructions and information for calculating helicopter CG.

Helicopter CG is expressed as a location, in inches or millimeters relative to


a reference point, where all of the helicopter’s weight is centered. The Bell
412 has two reference points, one for calculating longitudinal CG and one for
calculating lateral CG.

The longitudinal CG reference line is the reference datum line which is lo-
cated 20 inches aft of the helicopter nose. The lateral CG reference line is the
centerline of the helicopter (Figure WB-1).

Longitudinal and lateral CG of the helicopter must fall within the allowable
CG range listed in the Limitations section of the RFM for all phases of heli-
copter flight.

All calculations to determine helicopter CG are based on the weight of items


loaded on the helicopter and the item’s location in the helicopter in relation
to the reference datum lines.
This chapter provides information regarding helicopter center of gravity and
cockpit and cabin loading. Loading tables for pilot, passengers, cargo, and fuel
are provided. A sample loading problem is provided to aid in flight planning.
WEIGHT AND BALANCE

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY WB-1


WEIGHT AND BALANCE

0 23 FUSELAGE 166 243

WB-2
STATIONS

REF 47 87 117 139 156


DATUM

34
1 26
23 26
22 19
FS 138.00 BAGGAGE
8 CENTERLINE COMPARTMENT
0
8 84 IN.
2 19
22 23 26 26
LEGEND 34
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

1 PILOT SEAT
2 COPILOT OR PASSENGER SEAT

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


SEATS
LATERAL LOCATION (INCHES FROM G) OF HELICOPTER
LONGITUDINAL LOCATION (INCHES AFT OF REF DATUM) OF PERSONNEL
EXTERNAL CARGO
Figure WB-1. CG Reference Datum Lines
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

CENTER OF GRAVITY (CG)


EMPTY WEIGHT CG
The empty weight consists of the basic helicopter with required equipment,
optional equipment kits, transmission and gearbox oils (not engine oils), hy-
draulic fluid, unusable fuel, undrainable engine oil, and fixed ballast. The empty
weight center of gravity shall be adjusted within the limits of the applicable
Weight Empty Center of Gravity chart in the Maintenance Manual.

GROSS WEIGHT CG
It shall be the pilot’s responsibility to ensure that the helicopter is properly
loaded so that the entire flight is conducted within the limits of the Gross Weight
Center of Gravity chart in the Limitations section of the Flight Manual. The
gross weight center of gravity may be calculated from the helicopter Actual
Weight Record (historical records) and the Loading Tables shown in the RFM
and/or appropriate Flight Manual Supplements to assure safe loading.

CG LIMITATIONS
Longitudinal and lateral CG range limits are shown in Figure WB-2. Allowable
longitudinal CG range decreases as helicopter gross weight increases. Lateral
CG range is constant for all gross weights.

CALCULATING HELICOPTER CG
The helicopter’s actual CG is calculated by starting with a known helicopter
empty weight and moment. The empty weight and moment are originally cal-
culated by the manufacturer and are provided in the actual weight record sup-
plied with the helicopter when delivered. When installed items are added or
removed from the helicopter, the actual weight record must be ref igured to
provide a new empty weight (Figure WB-3).
WEIGHT AND BALANCE

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY WB-3


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

13000

135.1 141.4
12000 11900

11000
GROSS WEIGHT—LB

10000

9000
8800 FORWARD LIMIT AFT LIMIT

8000

7000

6400
130.4 MINIMUM WEIGHT
6000
130 132 134 136 138 140 142 144

REF
DATUM

FS 138.00
CENTERLINE

+4.5 INCHES
FS 138.00
WEIGHT AND BALANCE

–4.5 INCHES

Figure WB-2. CG Limits

WB-4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

BELLHELICOPTER TEXTRON
ACTUAL WEIGHT RECORD
MODEL 412
DATE WEIGHED SERIAL NUMBER

SCALE READINGS (LBS) SKID CONFIGURATION SCALE TARE NET

FORWARD JACKPOINT, F.S. 61.69 B.L. – 30.0 402.5 0.0 402.5


*IN LATERAL
FORWARD JACKPOINT, F.S. 61.69 B.L. + 30.0 2244.0 0.0 2244.0
CALCULATIONS
AFT JACKPOINT, F.S. 211.58 B.L. ± 14.53 3770.3 0.0 3770.3 – IS LEFT
TOTAL 6416.8 0.0 6416.8 + IS RIGHT
LONGITUDINAL C.G., AS WEIGHED
C.G. = 61.69 (2646.5) + 211.58 (3770.3) = 960983 = 149.76 IN.
TOTAL WEIGHT 6416.8

LATERAL C.G., AS WEIGHED*


C.G. = –30.0 (402.5) + 30.0 (2244.0) – 14.53 (3770.3) = + 463 = + .07 IN.
TOTAL WEIGHT 6416.8

LONGITUDINAL LATERAL* R
E
WEIGHT EMPTY DERIVATION WEIGHT ARM MOMENT ARM MOMENT
V

AS WEIGHED: 6416.8 149.76 960983 + 0.1 + 463

REMOVE: ENGINE OIL –25.2 169.1 –4261 0 0


PLUMB BOB –0.5 117.5 –59 –44.1 + 22
M/R BLADE FOLDING TOOL –64.0 134.1 –8582 0 0

ADD:

FIRST AID KIT + 5.1 46.0 + 235 –7.0 .36


SOFT INTERIOR + 33.2 130.0 + 4316 0 0
MAP CASE + 1.7 50.0 + 85 0 0
PAINT + 30.9 194.9 + 6022 0 0
IFR CURTAINS + 1.5 53.4 + 80 + 1.4 +2
CREW SEATS + 90.8 54.4 + 4940 0 0
PASSENGER SEATS + 120.2 104.6 + 12578 + 0.1 + 12
HEADSETS (2) + 2.6 116.3 + 302 0 0
STEPS + 23.2 107.3 + 2489 0 0

BATTERY BLOCK + 75.0 –5.7 –428 + 7.9 + 593


BALLAST + 120.0 –4.3 –516 0 0
WEIGHT EMPTY, SKID CONFIG. 6831.3 143.19 978184 + 0.2 + 1056
MOST FORWARD C.G.
WEIGHT EMPTY
+ PILOT AND COPILOT + 340.0 47.0 + 15980 0 0
+ PASSENGERS (4), CENTER SEAT, + 680.0 87.0 + 59160 0 0
FACING AFT
+ PASSENGERS (5), BACK SEAT, + 850.0 117.0 + 99450 0 0
FACING FWD
+ OIL, ENGINE + 24.5 169.1 + 4146 0 0
+ FUEL MOST FORWARD + 397.0 139.9 + 55540 0 0

MOST AFT C.G. 9122.8 132.9 1212460 + 0.1 + 1056


WEIGHT AND BALANCE

WEIGHT EMPTY
+ PILOT + 170.0 47.0 + 7990 + 22.0 + 3740
+ OIL, ENGINE + 24.5 169.1 + 4146 0 0
+ FUEL + 2247.0 151.5 + 340421 –0.4 –854

9272.8 143.5 1330741 + 0.4 + 3942


Page 1 of 2

Figure WB-3. Actual Weight Record (1 of 2)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY WB-5


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

BELL HELICOPTER TEXTRON


EQUIPMENT LIST
MODEL 412

DATE WEIGHED SERIAL NUMBER


OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED

PART NUMBER ITEM WEIGHT LONG LATERAL


ARM ARM

205-706-034-103 ROTOR BRAKE 29.2 115.4 – 2.4


205-706-043-017 PASSENGER SEATS 120.2 104.6 + 0.1

212=706-005-101 DUAL CONTROLS 22.6 35.9 – 22.7


212-706-049-001 COPILOT CLOCK 0.5 26.3 – 17.0
412-705-005-101 DME 6.6 19.1 + 6.7
412-705-006-101 FAA/IFR 3.1 43.7 – 6.6

412-705-015-101 # 2 VHF 5.7 16.8 – 4.5


412-705-015-103 NAV #1 12.6 95.1 –2.0

412-705-015-105 NAV #2 9.4 14.9 + 4.1


412-705-015-107 ADF 8.4 72.0 – 11.1
412-705-015-109 TRANSPONDER 4.9 14.9 – 0.3
412-706-012-103 ICS—AFT 10.0 86.1 + 1.3

412-706-116-119 COPILOTS INST. 28.9 22.8 + 12.8


412-706-117-113 STANDBY ATTITUDE IND. 8.8 10.8 + 6.6

412-705-502-101 STANDARD WINDSHIELD 51.9 120.3 + 0.3


412-705-510-101 SOFT INTERIOR 33.2 130.0 0
412-705-503-103 STANDARD SKID GEAR 143.3 122.5 0
212-706-105-003 PASSENGER STEPS 22.1 107.4 + 0.2

NOTE: Equipment listed above was installed when helicopter was weighted except as indicated by (*), or
partially installed as indicated by (D).

WEIGHT EMPTY DERIVATION CONT FROM PAGE 1


WEIGHT AND BALANCE

TOTAL FORWARD TO PAGE 1

Figure WB-3. Actual Weight Record (2 of 2)

WB-6 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

CG Formula
The CG of the helicopter, both longitudinal and lateral, is determined by math-
ematical calculations using one of the formulas shown below:

Moment = Weight x Arm

Center of Gravity = Total Moment


Total Weight

Moment is an expression of exerted force and is calculated by multiplying the


weight of an object by its Arm (distance from the reference datum line). For
example, a 170-pound pilot sitting in the pilot seat (right seat) has a longi-
tudinal moment of, or exerts a force of, 7,990 inch-pounds (170 x 47) and a
lateral moment of +3,740 inch-pounds (170 x 22) (Figure WB-1).

By adding the weights and moments of all fuel, persons, cargo, etc., to the
empty weight and moment of the helicopter, the total weight and total mo-
ment can be obtained. Then, by dividing the total moment by the total weight,
the helicopter CG is easily calculated.

Normally, helicopter longitudinal CG should be calculated for takeoff, land-


ing, and the most critical forward CG. Additionally, the Weight and Balance
section of the RMD recommends computation of the helicopter’s longitudi-
nal CG for all cargo/baggage conf igurations and whenever weight is loaded
into the baggage compartment. Longitudinal CG should also be computed when-
ever the crew doors, hinged panel door, or passenger doors are removed or
open for flight.

Lateral CG should be calculated whenever loading or the use of optional


equipment, such as the rescue hoist, can affect lateral CG. WEIGHT AND BALANCE

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY WB-7


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

DOORS OPEN OR REMOVED


Opening or removing doors results in center of gravity changes. Door con-
f iguration shall be symmetrical for both sides of the fuselage. Table WB-1
lists weight and moment adjustments which should be made in determining
the gross weight and CG when a pair of doors are opened or removed.

OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT AND KITS


The installation of optional equipment on the helicopter affects helicopter
weight and balance in two ways.

After the installation of optional equipment, the empty weight and moment
must be recomputed and any adjustment made to ensure that the empty weight
is within allowable limits of the maintenance manuals.

When certain optional equipment is installed, the helicopter’s weight and


balance must be calculated using the information in the appropriate RFM sup-
plement. This is particularly important for the external cargo hook, auxiliary
fuel, litter kit, rescue hoist, and any STC kits whose use might affect heli-
copter CG or loading.

Table WB-1. DOOR WEIGHTS AND MOMENTS

WEIGHT CHANGE ARM MOMENT


DOOR CHANGE
CONFIGURATION (POUNDS) (INCHES) (IN.-LB)

Both crew doors removed –39.0 46.2 –1802


Both hinged panels removed –20.4 85.0 –1734
Both sliding doors removed –90.4 130.0 –11,752
Both sliding doors full open 0 202.0 +6509
WEIGHT AND BALANCE

WB-8 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

LOADING THE HELICOPTER


Once the fuel requirements for the flight have been calculated, the pilot
should determine how the helicopter is loaded.

COCKPIT AND CABIN LOADING


A minimum crew weight of 170 pounds (77.1 kilograms) in the cockpit is re-
quired. Except for the two aft passenger seats, crew and passengers may be
loaded in any sequence without exceeding the gross weight center of gravity
limits approved for flight.

Refer to Table WB-2 for personnel weights and moments in English.

NOTE
The two aft outboard facing seats should not be occupied
unless at least four passengers are seated in the forward or
aft facing seats. The cabin deck cargo loading limit is 100
pounds per square foot (4.9 kg/100 sq cm).

WARNING

Helicopter center of gravity shall be computed for all


cargo baggage/conf igurations before flight.

Table WB-2. PILOT AND PASSENGER TABLE OF MOMENTS

PILOT AND PASSENGER TABLE OF MOMENTS (IN.-LB)

Passenger Passenger PASSENGER


Pilot and (4-Man Seat (5-Man Seat FACING OUTBOARD
Weight Copilot* Facing Aft) Facing Fwd) Fwd Seat Aft Seat
(Pounds) F.S. 47 F.S. 87 F.S. 117 F.S. 139 F.S. 156

100 4700 8700 11700 13900 15600


110 5170 9570 12870 15290 17160
120 5640 10440 14040 16680 18720
130 6110 11310 15210 18070 20280
140 6580 12180 16380 19460 21840
150 7050 13050 17550 20850 23400
160 7520 13920 18720 22240 24960
WEIGHT AND BALANCE

170 7990 14790 19890 23630 26520


180 8460 15660 21060 25020 28080
190 8930 16530 22230 26410 29640
200 9400 17400 23400 27800 31200
210 9870 18270 24570 29190 32760
220 10340 19140 25740 30580 34320

*Left Forward Seat


(TABLE I.D. 910670)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY WB-9


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Table WB-3. INTERNAL CARGO LOADING

INTERNAL CARGO LOADING TABLE


MOMENTS IN-LB
Weight
Pounds F.S. 75.0 F.S. 90.0 F.S. 105.0 F.S. 120.0 F.S. 135.0 F.S. 150.0
50 3750 4500 5250 6000 6750 7500
100 7500 9000 10500 12000 13500 15000
150 11250 13500 15750 18000 20250 22500
200 15000 18000 21000 24000 27000 30000
250 18750 22500 26250 30000 33750 37500

300 22500 27000 31500 36000 40500 45000


350 26250 31500 36750 42000 47250 52500
400 30000 36000 42000 48000 54000 60000
450 33750 40500 47250 54000 60750 67500
500 37500 45000 52500 60000 67500 75000

550 41250 49500 57750 66000 74250 83500


600 45000 54000 63000 72000 81000 90000
650 48750 58500 68250 78000 87750 97500
700 52500 63000 73500 84000 94500 105000
750 56250 67500 78750 90000 101250 112500

800 60000 72000 84000 96000 108000 120000


850 63750 76500 89250 102000 114750 127500
900 67500 81000 94500 108000 121500 135000
950 71250 85500 99750 114000 128250 142500
1000 75000 90000 105000 120000 135000 150000

1050 78750 94500 110250 126000 141750 157500


1100 82500 99000 115500 132000 148500 165000
1150 86250 103500 120750 138000 155250 172500
1200 90000 108000 126000 144000 162000 180000
1250 93750 112500 131250 150000 168750 187500

1300 97500 117000 136500 156000 175500 195000


1350 101250 121500 141750 162000 182250 202500
1400 105000 126000 147000 168000 189000 210000
WEIGHT AND BALANCE

1450 108750 130500 152250 174000 195750 217500


1500 112500 135000 157500 180000 202500 225000
(TABLE I.D. 910668)

WB-10 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT LOADING


The baggage compartment is accessible from the right side of the tailboom and
contains approximately 25 cubic feet (SP and EP) and 28 cubic feet (107 and
HP) of space. The baggage compartment has a load limit of 400 pounds (181
kilograms), not to exceed 100 pounds per square foot (4.9 kg/100 sq cm). These
are structural limitations only and do not infer that CG will remain within ap-
proved limits. When weight is loaded into the baggage compartment, indis-
criminate crew, passenger and fuel loading can no longer be assumed, and the
pilot must compute gross weight CG to assure loading within approved limits.

Loading of the baggage compartment should be from front to rear. The load
should be secured to tiedown f ittings if shifting of the load in flight could re-
sult in structural damage to the baggage compartment or in gross weight cen-
ter of gravity limits being exceeded.

Refer to Table WB-4 for baggage weights and moments.

FUEL LOADING
Due to the fuel flow sequencing between the tanks, the fuel loading CG will
vary between fuselage station 139.4 and 160.9. The maximum aft CG will occur
at approximately 952 pounds for Jet A, A-1, JP-5, and approximately 910
pounds for Jet B, JP-4. The maximum forward CG will occur at 397 pounds
for Jet A, A-1, JP-5, and at 379 pounds for Jet B, JP-4. With normal crew and
passenger loading, gross weight CG will remain within limits at any fuel quan-
tity. Refer to Tables WB-5 and WB-6 for fuel weights and moments.

Figure WB-4 depicts fuel tank location by station number.

WEIGHT AND BALANCE

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY WB-11


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Table WB-4. BAGGAGE LOADING

BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT
LOADING TABLE
NOTE: LOAD BAGGAGE AS FAR FORWARD AS POSSIBLE.

Weight Approximate CG Moment


(LB) (Fuselage Sta.—Inches) (IN.-LB)

20 245 4900
40 247 9880
60 249 14940
80 251 20080
100 253 25300

120 255 30600


140 257 35980
160 259 41440
180 261 46980
200 263 52600

220 265 58300


240 267 64080
260 269 69940
280 271 75880
300 273 81900

320 275 88000


340 277 94180
360 279 100440
380 281 106780
400 283 113200
(TABLE I.D. 910666)
WEIGHT AND BALANCE

WB-12 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Table WB-5. FUEL LOADING

USABLE FUEL LOADING TABLE


Jet B, JP-4 (6.5 Lbs/Gal) Jet A, A-1, JP-5 (6.8 Lbs/Gal)
U.S. Weight CG Moment U.S. Weight CG Moment
Gal. (Lb) In. In.-Lb. Gal. (Lb) In. In.-Lb.
10 65 139.4 9061 10 68 139.4 9479
20 130 139.6 18148 20 136 139.6 18986
30 195 139.8 27261 30 204 139.8 28519
40 260 139.9 36374 40 272 139.9 38053
50 325 139.9 45468 50 340 139.9 47566
*58.3 379 139.9 53022 *58.3 397 139.9 55540
60 390 141.1 55029 60 408 141.1 57569
70 455 146.0 66430 70 476 146.0 69496
80 520 149.8 77896 80 544 149.8 81491
90 585 152.7 89330 90 612 152.7 93452
100 650 155.0 100750 100 680 155.0 105400
110 715 156.8 112112 110 748 156.8 117286
120 780 158.3 123474 120 816 158.3 129173
130 845 159.7 134947 130 884 159.7 141175
140 910 160.9 146419 140.0 952 160.9 153177
150 975 156.4 152490 150 1020 156.4 159528
160 1040 152.4 158496 160 1088 152.4 165811
170 1105 149.0 164645 170 1156 149.1 172244
173.1 1125 148.0 166500 173.1 1177 148.0 174196
180 1170 149.0 174330 180 1224 149.0 182376
190 1235 150.4 185744 190 1292 150.4 194317
200 1300 151.6 197080 200 1360 151.6 206176
210 1365 152.8 208572 210 1428 152.8 218198
220 1430 153.9 220077 220 1496 153.9 230234
230 1495 154.7 231277 230 1564 154.7 241951
240 1560 155.7 242892 240 1632 155.7 254102
**243.1 1580 155.9 246322 **243.1 1653 155.9 257703
250 1625 154.8 251550 250 1700 154.8 263160
260 1690 153.2 258908 260- 1768 153.2 270858
270 1755 151.8 266409 270 1836 151.3 278705
280 1820 150.4 273728 280 1904 150.4 286362
290 1885 149.1 281054 290 1972 149.1 294025
295.1 1918 148.6 285015 295.1 2007 148.6 298240
300 1950 149.9 290550 300 2040 149.0 303960
310 2015 149.9 302049 310 2108 149.9 315989
320 2080 150.7 313456 320 2176 150.7 327923
330 2145 151.4 324753 330 2244 151.4 339742
WEIGHT AND BALANCE

***330.5 2148 151.5 325422 ***330.5 2247 151.5 340421

*Most critical fuel amount for most forward CG condition.


**Most critical fuel amount for most aft CG condition at weight empties up to 6,750 pounds.
***Most critical fuel amount for most aft CG condition at weight empties at 6,750 pounds or
greater. Weights given are nominal weights at 15° C.

NOTE
This table is invalid with auxiliary fuel tank(s) installed.
(TABLE I.D. 910664)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY WB-13


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Table WB-6. FUEL LOADING - LATERAL

USABLE FUEL LOADING TABLE


Jet B, JP-4 (6.5 Lbs/Gal) Jet A, A-1, JP-5 (6.8 Lbs/Gal)
U.S. Weight CG Moment U.S. Weight CG Moment
Gal. (Lb) In. In.-Lb. Gal. (Lb) In. In.-Lb.
10 65 0 0 10 68 0 0
20 130 0 0 20 136 0 0
30 195 0 0 30 204 0 0
40 260 0 0 40 272 0 0
50 325 0 0 50 340 0 0
58.3 379 0 0 58.3 397 0 0
60 390 –0.03 –12 60 408 –0.03 –12
70 455 –0.06 –27 70 476 –0.06 –29
80 520 –0.05 –26 80 544 –0.05 –27
90 585 –0.04 –23 90 612 –0.04 –24
100 650 –0.04 –26 100 680 –0.04 –27
110 715 –0.03 –21 110 748 –0.03 –22
120 780 –0.03 –23 120 816 –0.03 –24
130 845 –0.03 –25 130 884 –0.03 –27
140 910 –0.03 –27 140.0 952 –0.03 –29
150 975 –0.43 –419 150 1020 –0.43 –439
160 1040 –0.58 –603 160 1088 –0.58 –631
170 1105 –0.69 –762 170 1156 –0.69 –798
*173.1 1125 –0.72 –810 *173.1 1177 –0.72 –847
180 1170 –0.69 –807 180 1224 –0.69 –845
190 1235 –0.65 –803 190 1292 –0.65 –840
200 1300 –0.62 –806 200 1360 –0.62 –843
210 1365 –0.58 –792 210 1428 –0.58 –828
220 1430 –0.56 –801 220 1496 –0.56 –838
230 1495 –0.53 –792 230 1564 –0.53 –829
240 1560 –0.51 –796 240 1632 –0.51 –832
250 1625 –0.49 –796 250 1700 –0.49 –833
260 1690 –0.48 –811 260- 1768 –0.48 –849
270 1755 –0.46 –807 270 1836 –0.46 –845
280 1820 –0.44 –801 280 1904 –0.44 –838
290 1885 –0.43 –811 290 1972 –0.43 –848
300 1950 –0.41 –800 300 2040 –0.41 –836
310 2015 –0.40 –806 310 2108 –0.40 –843
320 2080 –0.39 –811 320 2176 –0.39 –849
330 2145 –0.38 –815 330 2244 –0.38 –853
330.5 2148 –0.38 –816 330.5 2247 –0.38 –854
WEIGHT AND BALANCE

*Most critical fuel amount for left side most lateral CG condition.

(TABLE I.D. 910662)

WB-14 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


NOTE: STATION 0 (REFERENCE DATUM) IS LOCATED 20 INCHES (508 MILLIMETERS)
AFT OF THE MOST FORWARD POINT OF THE CABIN NOSE.

FUSELAGE
STATIONS 177.5
102 127 200 243
0
166.5

REF 47 84.5 155


DATUM

FS 138.00 BAGGAGE
COMPARTMENT
84 IN.
2
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


LEGEND
1 PILOT SEAT
178
2 COPILOT OR PASSENGER SEAT
FUEL TANKS
LONGITUDINAL LOCATION (INCHES AFT OF REF DATUM) OF PERSONNEL
EXTERNAL CARGO

Figure WB-4. Internal Fuel Tank Station Location

WB-15
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

SAMPLE LOADING PROBLEM


The helicopter is chartered to transport nine passengers and 180 pounds of
baggage on a trip that will require approximately 260 U.S. gallons of fuel one
way. The helicopter will be refueled and the 190-pound pilot will return
alone. Determine extreme CG conditions for both flights.

OUTBOUND FLIGHT

LONGITUDINAL LATERAL

WEIGHT CG MOMENT CG MOMENT

Weight Empty 7000 143.0 1001000 +0.2 +1400

+Oil 25 4146 0 0
+Pilot 190 8930 +22.0 +4180
+Passengers, (5 man seat) 850 99450 0 0
+Passengers, (4 man seat) 680 59160 0 0
+Baggage 180 46980 0 0

Basic Operating Weight + Payload 8925 136.7 1219666 +0.6 +5580

+Takeoff Fuel (320 U.S. Gallons) 2080 150.7 313456 –0.4 –811

Takeoff Condition 11005 139.3 1533122 +0.4 +4769

Basic Operating Weight + Payload 8925 136.7 1219666 +0.6 +5580

+Critical Forward Fuel


(58.3 U.S. Gallons) 379 139.9 53022 0 0

Most Forward Condition 9304 136.8 1272688 +0.6 +5580

Basic Operating Weight + Payload 8925 136.7 1219666 +0.6 +5580

+Landing Fuel (60 U.S. Gallons) 390 141.1 55029 0 0

Landing Condition 9315 136.8 1274695 +0.6 +5580


WEIGHT AND BALANCE

WB-16 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

RETURN FLIGHT

LONGITUDINAL LATERAL
WEIGHT CG MOMENT CG MOMENT

Weight Empty 7000 143.0 1001000 +0.2 +1400

+Oil 25 4146 0 0
+Pilot 190 8930 +22.0 +4180

Basic Operating Weight 7215 140.6 1014076 +0.8 +5580

+Takeoff Fuel (320 U.S. Gallons) 2080 150.7 313456 –0.4 –811

Takeoff Condition 9295 142.8 1327532 +0.5 +4769

Basic Operating Weight 7215 140.6 1014076 +0.8 +5580

+Critical Forward Fuel


(58.3 U.S. Gallons) 379 139.9 53022 0 0

Most Forward Condition 7594 140.5 1067098 +0.8 +5580

Basic Operating Weight 7215 140.6 1014076 +0.8 +5580

+Landing Fuel (60 U.S. Gallons) 390 141.1 55029 0 0

Landing Condition 7605 140.6 1069105 +0.7 +5580

WEIGHT AND BALANCE

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY WB-17


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

WEIGHT AND BALANCE COMPUTATION


(LONGITUDINAL)
Once the pilot has determined helicopter loading, the actual CG is computed
using the loading tables provided in the RFM and supplements. Loading
charts with weights and moments are provided for pilots passengers, inter-
nal cargo, baggage compartment, and fuel (Table WB-2).

Each table includes a range of weights from which the exact or closest weight
and the corresponding moment can be chosen. Moments for odd weights
and/or locations can be found by multiplying the exact weight by the fuse-
lage station where the weight is loaded.

The weights and moments for fuel, oil, and all persons and objects loaded on
the helicopter are added to the helicopter’s empty weight and moment to ob-
tain a total weight and total moment. Dividing the total moment by the total
weight results in the takeoff CG. The CG f igure obtained should be checked
against the gross weight center-of-gravity chart to ensure that the helicopter
CG falls within allowable limits. The same steps should be taken to get land-
ing and most critical forward CG.

WEIGHT AND BALANCE COMPUTATION


(LATERAL)
Lateral CG computations are f igured in a similar manner; however, there are
no loading tables provided. Lateral moments must be computed by multiplying
the weights of items by their respective distances from the helicopter centerline.
When computing lateral moments, a plus (+) is used to indicate moments right
of centerline and a minus (–) is used to indicate moments left of centerline.

The weights and lateral moments for all persons and objects loaded on the
helicopter are added to the helicopter’s empty weight and lateral moment to
obtain a total weight and total lateral moment. Dividing the total lateral mo-
ment by the total weight provides the lateral CG, having a value that must be
between +4.5 and –4.5 inches.

Some lateral moments may cancel each other when added. For example, a 170-
pound pilot at lateral station +22, having a moment of +3,740, and a 170-pound
copilot at lateral station –22, having a lateral moment of –3, 740, when added
to the empty CG moment, have lateral moments which cancel out. However,
their weights do not cancel and must be added to the empty weight to ensure
proper lateral CG computation.
WEIGHT AND BALANCE

WB-18 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

REQUIRED EQUIPMENT LIST


A list of basic equipment required for flight is presented. Weights and arms
listed for each item were included in calculating the empty weight and cen-
ter of gravity.

Table WB-7. REQUIRED EQUIPMENT LIST

UNIT LONGITUDINAL LATERAL ARM


REQUIRED WEIGHT ARM (–LEFT, +RIGHT)
EQUIPMENT LB/kg IN/mm IN/mm
Indicators
Attitude 7.5/3.4 21.0/533 +17.0/+432
Airspeed 1.0/0.5 22.0/559 +12.5/+318
Vertical Speed 1.8/0.8 23.2/589 +21.3/+541
Altimeter 1.8/0.8 22.0/559 +21.3/+541
Triple Tachometer 2.5/1.1 23.2/589 +9.0/+229
XMSN Oil Press & Temp 0.7/0.3 25.6/650 +6.0/+152
Gearbox Oil Press & Temp 1.0/0.5 25.6/650 +3.0/+76
Engine Oil Press & Temp (2) 1.0/0.5 ea. 24.2/615 +4.7/+119
Fuel Pressure (2) 0.6/0.3 ea. 24.8/630 +4.7/+119
Gas Producer Tachometer (2) 1.0/0.5 ea. 23.0/584 +4.7/+119
Turbine Inlet Temperature (2) 0.8/0.4 ea. 23.6/599 +4.7/+119
Hydraulic Oil Press & Temp (2) 0.4/0.2 ea. 23.0/584 0/0
Dual Torque Pressure 2.6/1.2 23.2/589 +12.5/+318
Fuel Quantity 1.0/0.5 23.6/599 +1.3/+33
Standby Compass 0.8/0.4 38.0/965 +17.6/+477
Horizontal Situation 6.5/2.9 22.5/572 +17.0/+432
Clock 0.5/0.2 25.8/655 +26.2/+665
Free Air Temperature 0.2/0.1 40.0/1016 +19.0/+483
Dual DC Ammeter 1.0/0.5 24.0/610 –1.3/–41
Dual AC/DC Voltmeter (2) 1.0/0.5 ea. 24.0/610 0/0
Fire Warning—
Engine No. 1 0.4/0.2 24.0/610 –1.7/–43
Engine No. 2 0.4/0.2 24.0/610 +4.7/+119
Baggage Compartment 0.3/0.1 22.0/559 –1.8/–46
Low Fuel WRN—Master Master 6.5/2.9 24.8/630 –2.5/–64
Caution Panel
Starter-Generator, L.H. 30.0/13.6 159.0/4039 –8.0/–203
Starter-Generator, R.H. 30.0/13.6 159.0/4039 +18.0/+457
Battery 74.5/33.8 –6.0/–152 +8.0/+203
Starter Toggle Switch 0.4/0.2 38.0/965 +10.0/+254
Fuel Igniter Switch (2) 0.2/0.1 ea. 33.0/838 +3.0/+76
Anticollision Light, Upper 1.5/0.7 169.0/4293 0/0
Anticollision Light, Lower 1.5/0.7 65.4/1661 0/0
Landing Light 8.0/3.6 85.3/2167 –4.8/–104
Searchlight 5.5/2.5 50.0/1270 +17.6/+447
WEIGHT AND BALANCE

Position Lights—
Forward Lower (2) 0.3/0.1 ea. 66.0/1676 0/0
Forward Upper (2) 0.3/0.1 ea. 109.0/2769 0/0
Aft (2) 0.3/0.1 ea. 432.0/10973 0/0
Circuit-Breaker Panels (2) 9.7/4.4 ea. 55.4/1407 0/0
Nonessential Bus Switch 0.1/NEG. 41.3/1049 +3.7/+94

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY WB-19


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Table WB-7. REQUIRED EQUIPMENT LIST (Cont)

UNIT LONGITUDINAL LATERAL ARM


REQUIRED WEIGHT ARM (–LEFT, +RIGHT)
EQUIPMENT LB/kg IN/mm IN/mm
Essential Bus
R.H. Ovhd Cont Pnl 3.2/1.5 41.3/1049 +3.7/+94
L.H. Ovhd Cont Pnl 2.6/1.2 41.3/1049 –3.7/–94
Low Fuel Wrn XMTR (2) 0.1/NEG. 143.0/3632 0/0
ea.
VHF No. 1 Radio—
Transceiver and Mount 3.8/1.7 10.1/257 –7.8/–198
Control 0.5/0.2 39.0/991 –4.3/–109
Antenna 1.0/0.5 211.1/5362 0/0

Windshield Wiper—
Blade and Arm (2) 1.6/0.7 ea. 34.5/876 0/0
Motor (2) 4.2/1.9 ea. 41.0/1041 0/0

Fire Extinguisher, Hand Type, L.H. 3.0/1.4 67.8/1722 –35.0/–889


Fire Extinguisher, Hand Type, R.H. 3.0/1.4 53.5/1359 +34.5/+876

Flight Manual 1.7/0.8 –/– –/–


Seat with Restraint—Pilot 45.4/20.6 54.4/1382 +22.0/+559
Seat with Restraint—Copilot 45.4/20.6 54.4/1382 –22.0/–559
Map and Data Case` 1.9/0.9 59.0/1499 0/0
First Aid Kit 5.1/2.3 45.5/1156 –7.2/–183
WEIGHT AND BALANCE

WB-20 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

PERFORMANCE
CONTENTS
Page
INTRODUCTION ....................................................................... PER-1
GENERAL ................................................................................... PER-1
Basis of Certif ication ............................................................ PER-2
Type of Operation .................................................................. PER-2
Required Equipment .............................................................. PER-2
Optional Equipment............................................................... PER-2
Flight Crew ............................................................................. PER-2
Doors Opened or Removed ................................................... PER-3
Weight/CG............................................................................... PER-3
Airspeed .................................................................................. PER-5
Altitude .................................................................................... PER-9
Ambient Air Temperature ..................................................... PER-9
Height–Velocity ..................................................................... PER-9
Maneuvering......................................................................... PER-11
Slope Landing ...................................................................... PER-11
Systems ................................................................................. PER-11
PERFORMANCE CHARTS ................................................... PER-11
POWER ASSURANCE CHECK ............................................ PER-12
DENSITY ALTITUDE CHART ............................................. PER-15
CRITICAL RELATIVE WIND AZIMUTHS CHART ........ PER-18
HOVER CEILING CHARTS .................................................. PER-20
Hover Ceiling—IGE............................................................ PER-20
Hover Ceiling —OGE ......................................................... PER-22
TAKEOFF DISTANCE CHARTS .......................................... PER-24
TWIN-ENGINE RATE-OF-CLIMB CHARTS .................... PER-27
SINGLE-ENGINE RATE-OF-CLIMB CHARTS ................ PER-27
LANDING DISTANCE ........................................................... PER-29
AIRSPEED CALIBRATION CHART ................................... PER-30
MOST EFFICIENT AIRSPEED ............................................ PER-31
NOISE LEVELS ....................................................................... PER-32
CATEGORY A OPERATIONS ............................................... PER-33
FUEL FLOW vs AIRSPEED................................................... PER-34

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY PER-i


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure Title Page

PER-1 Weight-Altitude-Temperature Limitations Chart ... PER-4


PER-2 Gross Weight Center-of-Gravity Chart .................... PER-6
PER-3 Airspeed Limitations Placard .................................... PER-7
PER-4 Max Speed—Sideward and Rearward Flight.......... PER-8
PER-5 Height–Velocity Diagram ........................................ PER-10
PER-6 Power Assurance Check for PT6T-3D: Hover ...... PER-13
PER-7 Power Assurance Check for PT6T-3D: Flight ...... PER-14
PER-8 Density Altitude Chart ............................................ PER-17
PER-9 Critical Relative Wind Azimuths............................ PER-19
PER-10 Hover Ceiling—In-Ground Effect....................... PER-21
PER-11 Hover Ceiling—Out of Ground Effect................ PER-23
PER-12 Takeoff Distance Charts ....................................... PER-25
PER-13 Single-Engine Rate-of-Climb Chart ................... PER-28
PER-14 Single-Engine Landing Distance Chart.............. PER-29
PER-15 Airspeed Calibration Chart .................................. PER-30
PER-16 Power Required ...................................................... PER-31
PER-17 Category A Operations .......................................... PER-34
PER-18 Fuel Flow vs Airspeed Charts .............................. PER-35

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY PER-iii


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

PERFORMANCE
INTRODUCTION
This chapter introduces the methods the operator may use to determine the
performance capabilities of the Bell 412EP for a particular operation. Some
of the pertinent limitations from the Rotorcraft Flight Manual (RFM) have
been included for training purposes.

The performance data presented herein are derived from the engine manu-
facturer’s specif ication power for the engine less installation losses. These
data are applicable to the basic helicopter without any optional equipment which
would appreciably affect lift, drag, or power available.

GENERAL
It is helpful to remember that the performance data in Section 4 of the RFM
is informational data while the limitations in Section I of the RFM require
mandatory compliance. The weight of the loaded helicopter and the result-
ing center of gravity is the variable that the pilot can control most effectively
in order to achieve the performance required for the operation. The weight
and balance of the 412EP is a primary factor in many of the requirements of
the Limitations section of the RFM.

Helicopter performance charts are provided in Section 4 of the RFM with ex-
panded data in Section 4 of the Rotorcraft Manufacturer's Data (RMD).

Data supplied in these sections reflects information needed to obtain opti-


mum helicopter performance while, at the same time, minimizing wear and
tear on individual parts to ensure maximum component life and safety.

Performance charts provide the pilot with information on how the helicopter
performs, provided applicable limitations are followed and the engines are
providing proper power. Since engine performance is somewhat variable, he-
licopter performance charts are based on the engine manufacturer's specif i-
cation engine power.

The following text covers limitations and performance charts separately.


Sample performance charts are provided for reference. The pilot should refer
to the latest revisions of the RFM and RMD for the most current information.

The pilot should refer to Section 1 of the RFM during the following discussion.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY PER-1


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

BASIS OF CERTIFICATION
The Bell 412EP is certif ied under FAR Part 29 for Transport Category
Helicopters and is approved for both Category A and Category B operations.

TYPE OF OPERATION
The helicopter is certif ied for flight in non-icing conditions, both day and
night VFR/ IFR.

REQUIRED EQUIPMENT
A list of required equipment is provided in the RFM Weight and Balance sec-
tion. These items are required for both VFR and IFR certif ied Bell 412s.
Additional required equipment for IFR operation is provided in Section 1,
Limitations, of the RFM.

OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Optional equipment supplements are provided in Appendix A of the RFM and
are listed by a different number for each piece of equipment covered.
Limitations, performance data, and weight and balance information for op-
tional equipment approved under a Supplemental Type Certif icate (STC) are
provided by the holder of the STC.

If optional equipment is installed, the associated limitations, procedures


(both normal and malfunction), performance data, and weight and balance in-
formation, provided in the supplements, have the same FAA approval as that
supplied in the RFM.

Some optional equipment may prohibit operation of the helicopter under cer-
tain circumstances.

For example, installation of the Nightsun searchlight or the Loudhailer pro-


hibits IFR operations. The pilot should consult the appropriate RFM supple-
ment for specif ic limitations and restrictions.

FLIGHT CREW
The Bell 412EP is certif ied for single-pilot operation for both VFR and IFR.
An additional crewmember is required when inter nal cargo includes
flammable materials.

PER-2 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

DOORS OPENED OR REMOVED


The helicopter may be operated with the doors opened or removed during VFR
operations. Conf iguration limitations apply.

WEIGHT/CG
General
Numerous weight and CG limitations apply; the pilot should refer to the RFM
for additional information.

Maximum gross weight for takeoff and landing is 11,900 pounds unless oth-
erwise restricted by the weight-altitude-temperature chart or other factors.

Weight-Altitude-Temperature Limitations Chart


The weight-altitude-temperature limitations for takeoff, landing, and in-
ground-effect (IGE) maneuvers chart, commonly called the W-A-T chart, is
used to determine the maximum allowable weight for takeoffs, landings, and
IGE hovering operation. The W-A-T chart is a limitations chart as opposed
to a performance chart. The gross weights determined from the W-A-T chart
may exceed continuous IGE and OGE hover capability under certain ambi-
ent conditions (Figure PER-1).

The W-A-T chart is a good general reference chart for flight planning and can
be used to determine helicopter gross weight limits for the most critical por-
tion of a flight. Once the limiting gross weight is determined, the takeoff gross
weight can be calculated.

W-A-T chart gross weight limitations should be computed for both initial take-
off and the hottest and highest conditions expected for IGE hovering.
Conservative rather than optimistic OAT and PA values should be used to avoid
less than expected performance.

If the helicopter must be hovered extensively IGE or hovered OGE to perform


the flight mission, the pilot should refer to the Hover Ceiling IGE or OGE
charts in the Performance section of the RFM to determine helicopter gross
weight. A detailed discussion of the Hover Ceiling Charts is provided later
in this chapter.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY PER-3


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

WEIGHT — ALTITUDE — TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS


FOR TAKEOFF, LANDING AND IN-GROUND-EFFECT MANEUVERS
NOTE: ALLOWABLE GROSS WEIGHTS OBTAINED
FROM THIS CHART MAY EXCEED CONTINUOUS
HOVER CAPABILITY UNDER CERTAIN AMBIENT
CONDITIONS. REFER TO HOVER CEILING CHARTS
IN SECTION 4.
14,000 FT
DEN. ALT. LIMIT
000
14,
00
12,0

MAXIMUM
GROSS WEIGHT
000

LIMIT
10,

MAX OAT
0
8,00
00
6,0

MIN OAT
00
4,0
00
2,0
L
T
EVE
—F
AL

DE
SE
ITU
ALT
URE

10,900 LB
ESS
PR

11.9

–40 –20 0 20 40 60 9 10 11 12 LB x 1000


CONDITIONS: OAT—°C
OAT—28°C 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.4 kg x 1000
PA—4,000 FT GROSS WEIGHT

Figure PER-1. Weight-Altitude-Temperature Limitations Chart

PER-4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Additional Weight Limits


Minimum gross weight for flight is 6,400 pounds.

Minimum combined weight in the crew seats is 170 pounds.

Center-of-Gravity Limits
CG range is from station 130 to 144, depending on gross weight (Figure PER-2).

Lateral CG limits are 4.5 inches left and right of the fuselage centerline.

Loading Limitations
Passenger Loading—Outboard facing seats should not be occupied until at
least four of the forward or aft facing seats are occupied.

Internal Cargo Loading—Maximum deck loading is 100 pounds per square


foot. Cargo tiedown limitations are provided in the RFM.

AIRSPEED
All airspeed limitations are based on installation of the airspeed indicator,
part number 412-075-009-105.

Minimum IFR airspeed is 60 KIAS.

V NE is 140 KIAS from sea level up to 3,000 feet density altitude for all gross
weights. V NE decreases with density altitude in accordance with the cockpit
placard (Figure PER-3).

An airspeed of 105 KIAS maximum with torque above 81%.

V NE with only one helipilot/autopilot engaged is 115 KIAS.

Basic V NE applies with both helipilots/autopilots disengaged.

Steady-state autorotation V NE below 10,000 feet PA is 105 KIAS.

Steady-state autorotation V NE above 10,000 feet PA is 80 KIAS.

V NE with doors opened asymmetrically is 80 KIAS.

V NE with doors in transit or unlocked is 60 KIAS.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY PER-5


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

13000

135.1 141.4
12000
11900

11000
GROSS WEIGHT

10000

9000
8800 FORWARD LIMIT AFT LIMIT

8000

7000

6400
130.4 MINIMUM WEIGHT
6000
130 132 134 136 138 140 142 144

Figure PER-2. Gross Weight Center-of-Gravity Chart

PER-6 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

PRESSURE ALTITUDE IN FT X 100


OAT
°C 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
INDICATED VNE KNOTS
51.7 137 — — — — — — — — — —
40 140 134 128 122 — — — — — — —
20 140 139 133 127 121 115 109 103 97 — —
0 140 140 140 133 127 121 115 109 103 96 91
–10 140 140 140 140 131 124 118 112 106 100 94
–20 140 140 140 138 133 127 121 115 108 102 96
–30 140 139 134 129 124 120 115 110 106 101 97
–40 134 129 124 120 116 111 107 102 98 94 90
AUTOROTATION VNE 80 KIAS ABOVE 10,000 FT.

Figure PER-3. Airspeed Limitations Placard

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY PER-7


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Maximum speed for sideward or rearward flight is 35 knots at or below 3,000


feet density altitude.

Maximum crosswind or tailwind is 35 knots at or below 3,000 feet density


altitude. For additional limitations, refer to Figure PER-4 and the Critical
Relative Wind Azimuths diagram in Section 4 of the RFM.

45°
PEDAL CRITICAL WIND AZIMUTH—
LEFT PEDAL MAY BE LIMITED
WITH DIRECTIONAL AFCS
HARDOVER. REFER TO SECTION 3
OF THE RFM.
270° 90°

105°

LONGITUDINAL CYCLIC
CRITICAL WIND AZIMUTH—
AFT CYCLIC MAY BE
LIMITED WITH LONGITUDINAL 180°
AFCS HARDOVER. 14,000 FT DENSITY ALTITUDE
LIMITED FOR IGE MANEUVERS
14,000

12,000

10,000
DENSITY ALTITUDE—FEET

WIND LIMIT

8,000

6,000

4,000

2,000

0
14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38

MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE WINDSPEED—35 KNOTS

Figure PER-4. Maximum Speed—Sideward and Rearward Flight,


Crosswind and Tailwind at a Hover

PER-8 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Climb/Descent Limitations
Maximum IFR rate of climb or descent is 1,000 feet per minute.

Maximum IFR approach slope is 5°.

ALTITUDE
Maximum operating pressure altitude is 20,000 feet.

Maximum DA for takeoff, landing, and IGE maneuvers is 14,000 feet.

AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE


Maximum temperature is 125° F (51.7° C).

Minimum temperature is –40° C/F.

HEIGHT–VELOCITY
The height–velocity diagram indicates airspeed/altitude areas (shaded) from
which a safe single-engine landing to a smooth level surface cannot be as-
sured. The height–velocity diagram is only valid when weight-altitude-tem-
perature limitations are not exceeded (Figure PER-5).

NOTE
When the aircraft is in an approved conf iguration of
nine passengers or less, the Height–Velocity Diagram
is removed as a limitation, provided that takeoffs and
landings are limited to a maximum of 9,000 feet den-
sity altitude or less (see BHT-412-FMS-31).

The height-velocity limitations are critical in the event of single engine fail-
ure during takeoff, landing, or other operation near the surface. The AVOID
area of the height velocity diagram def ines the combinations of airspeed and
height above ground from which a safe single engine landing on a smooth,
level, f irm surface cannot be assured.

The height-velocity diagram is valid only when the weight-altitude-temper-


ature limitations are not exceeded (Figure PER-5). The diagram does not de-
f ine the conditions which assure continued flight following an engine failure
nor the conditions from which a safe power off landing can be made.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY PER-9


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

HEIGHT—VELOCITY DIAGRAM
FOR SMOOTH, LEVEL, FIRM SURFACES
400 120
AND ABOVE NOTE: AND ABOVE
HELICOPTER CONFIGURATION SHALL COM-
375 380 PLY WITH THE WEIGHT ALTITUDE. TEMPER- 114.3
ATURE LIMITS AS PRESENTED IN FIGURE PER-1
360 FOR HEIGHT-VELOCITY DIAGRAM TO BE 110
VALID.

340
100
320

SKID HEIGHT ABOVE SURFACE—METERS


300 90
SKID HEIGHT ABOVE SURFACE—FEET

280
260 80

240
70
220

200 60
180
160 50

140
40
120

100 30
AVOID
80
20
60

40
10
20 4.9
16
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 VNE
INDICATED AIRSPEED—KNOTS

Figure PER-5. Height–Velocity Diagram

PER-10 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

MANEUVERING
Aerobatic maneuvers are prohibited.

SLOPE LANDING
Slope landings are limited to a maximum 10° side slope and 4° nose up or
nose down slope.

SYSTEMS
Section 1 of the RFM also provides limitations for operation of the electri-
cal, powerplant, transmission, rotor, fuel, oil, and hydraulic systems. The pilot
should review these limitations and the instrument panel gage markings ap-
plicable to the specif ic system.

PERFORMANCE CHARTS
The example performance charts on the following pages include conditions
listed below each chart which provide necessary data to work the sample prob-
lem shown.
Helicopter performance, provided in the "Performance" section of the RFM,
is based on the powerplant producing the engine manufacturer's specif ica-
tion power. The power assurance check chart is used to ensure that each en-
gine is operating property and is capable of producing minimum specif ication
power as installed in the helicopter.
If the engines pass the power assurance check the helicopter should be ca-
pable of meeting all performance chart capabilities.
If an engine exceeds the power assurance check limits, the helicopter's per-
formance can be expected to be less than performance chart capabilities.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY PER-11


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

POWER ASSURANCE CHECK


Power Assurance Check charts are provided to determine if the engines can
produce installed specif ication power. (Figure PER-6)

The power assurance check does not require the engine to produce maximum
power, but rather determines that, for the power produced during the check,
engine parameters fall within limits of the manufacturer's specif ication en-
gine. If limits are not exceeded, the engine's performance can be expected to
provide the power of a specif ication engine.

A power assurance check should be performed daily. Additional checks should


be made if unusual operating conditions or indications arise. The hover check
is performed prior to takeoff (Figure PER-6), and the in-flight check (Figure
PER-7 ) is provided for periodic in-flight monitoring of engine performance.
Either power assurance check method may be selected at the discretion of the
pilot. It is the pilot’s responsibility to accomplish the procedure safely, con-
sidering passenger load, terrain being overflown, and the qualifications of per-
sons on board to assist in watching for other air traff ic and to record power
check data.

If either engine does not meet the requirements of the hover or the in-flight
power assurance check, published performance may not be achievable. The
cause of engine power loss, or excessive ITT should be determined as soon
as practical. Refer to Engine Maintenance Manual.

Two power assurance charts are provided in the RFM. One, titled "Power
Assurance Check (Hover)," is used with the helicopter in a hover or resting
lightly on the ground. The other, titled "Power Assurance Check (In-Flight),"
is used during cruise flight. The hover check is generally preferred since more
stable engine performance can be achieved. Whichever check is used, it
should be performed daily and whenever unusual operating conditions or en-
gine indications arise.

Helicopter conf iguration and instructions to perform the check are printed
at the top of both charts. Both engines must be operating and the heater/ECU
systems must be off to ensure proper readings. Each engine is checked sep-
arately with N 2 rpm at 97%.
The engine being checked must be operating at a torque setting that results
in a high enough N 1 rpm to ensure that the compressor air bleed valve is closed.
As a general rule 50 % or higher torque on the engine being checked provides
proper results.

PER-12 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

MODEL 412
POWER ASSURANCE CHECK — HOVER
PT6T-3D ENGINE
CONDITIONS: PA—O FT
TORQUE—63% OAT—10°C

HEATER/ECU—OFF. ENTER CHART AT INDICATED ENGINE TORQUE,


MOVE UP TO INTERSECT PRESSURE ALTITUDE,
THROTTLES: PROCEED TO THE RIGHT TO INTERSECT
TEST ENGINE—FULL OPEN, FRICTIONED OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE, THEN MOVE UP
OTHER ENGINE—FLIGHT IDLE. TO READ VALUES FOR MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE
ITT.
N2 RPM—97%.
IF INDICATED ITT EXCEEDS MAX ALLOWABLE,
COLLECTIVE PITCH—INCREASE UNTIL LIGHT REPEAT CHECK STABILIZING POWER FOUR
ON SKIDS OR HOVERING. DO NOT EXCEED MINUTES.
810° ITT, 103.1% N1 RPM, OR 73.2% TORQUE.
IF EITHER ENGINE EXCEEDS ALLOWABLE ITT
STABILIZE POWER ONE MINUTE, THEN RECORD AFTER STABILIZING FOUR MINUTES,
PRESSURE ALTITUDE, OAT, ENGINE TORQUE PUBLISHED PERFORMANCE MAY NOT BE
AND ITT. ACHIEVABLE. CAUSE SHOULD BE DETERMINED
AS SOON AS PRACTICAL.

MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE ITT — °C


500 550 600 650 700 750 790° 800
BLEED VALVE
OPENS
PR
ES
SU 0

40
RE (SE
AL L

30
TI EV
A
TU EL

20
DE )

10
20 00

O

00

AT
40

FE

–1

60

0
ET

–2
00
80

0
00
10

–3
,00

0
–4
0

0
–5
0

40 50 60 70 80 MAXIMUM FOR TAKEOFF

ENGINE TORQUE — PERCENT (INDICATED)

Figure PER-6. Power Assurance Check for PT6T-3D Engine—Hover

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY PER-13


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

MODEL 412
POWER ASSURANCE CHECK — IN-FLIGHT
PT6T-3D ENGINE

CONDITIONS: PA—O FT
TORQUE—63% OAT—10°C

ESTABLISH LEVEL FLIGHT ABOVE 1,000 FEET AGL. ENTER CHART AT INDICATED ENGINE TORQUE, MOVE
UP TO INTERSECT PRESSURE ALTITUDE, PROCEED
AIRSPEED—100 KIAS (OR VNE, IF LESS). TO THE RIGHT TO INTERSECT OUTSIDE AIR
TEMPERATURE, THEN MOVE UP TO READ VALUES
HEATER/ECU—OFF. FOR MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE ITT.

THROTTLES: IF INDICATED ITT EXCEEDS MAX ALLOWABLE,


TEST ENGINE—FULL OPEN, FRICTIONED. REPEAT CHECK STABILIZING POWER FOUR
MINUTES.
OTHER ENGINE—DECREASE SLOWLY UNTIL
TEST ENGINE TORQUE IS WITHIN TEST REPEAT CHECK USING OTHER ENGINE.
RANGE. DO NOT EXCEED 810° ITT,
103.1% N1 RPM, OR 73.2% TORQUE. IF EITHER ENGINE EXCEEDS ALLOWABLE ITT
AFTER STABILIZING FOUR MINUTES,
N2 RPM—97%. PUBLISHED PERFORMANCE MAY NOT BE
ACHIEVABLE. CAUSE SHOULD BE DETERMINED AS
STABILIZE POWER ONE MINUTE IN LEVEL FLIGHT, SOON AS PRACTICAL.
THEN RECORD PRESSURE ALTITUDE, OAT,
ENGINE TORQUE AND ITT.

MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE ITT — °C


500 550 600 650 700 750 790° 800
BLEED VALVE
OPENS
PR
ES
SU 0

40
RE (SE
AL A L

30
TI EV
TU EL

20
DE )

10
20 00

O

00

AT
4

FE

–1
0


60

0
ET

–2
00
80

0
00
10

–3
,00

0
–4
0

0
–5
0

40 50 60 70 80 MAXIMUM FOR TAKEOFF

ENGINE TORQUE — PERCENT (INDICATED)

Figure PER-7. Power Assurance Check for


PT6T-3D Engine—In-Flight

PER-14 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

DENSITY ALTITUDE CHART


An industry standard density altitude chart is provided to allow the pilot to
convert pressure altitude (PA) and ambient/outside air temperature (OAT) to
density altitude (DA). The chart also provides a true airspeed conversion
factor which, when multiplied times calibrated airspeed (KCAS), gives true
airspeed (KTAS) (Figure PER-8).

The pilot can determine PA from his altimeter by setting 29.92 inches Hg in the
Kollsman window. Ambient temperature/OAT is available from the cockpit OAT
gage. The PA lines in the body of the chart are identif ied by the pressure alti-
tude numbers above the lines. The heavy black diagonal line is for standard day.

A Density Altitude Chart (Figure PER-8) is provided to aid in calculation of


performance and limitations. Density altitude is an expression of the density
of the air in terms of height above sea level; hence, the less dense the air, the
higher the density altitude. For standard conditions of temperature and pres-
sure, density altitude is the same as pressure altitude. As temperature increases
above standard for any altitude, the density altitude will also increase to val-
ues higher than pressure altitude. The chart expresses density altitude as a
function of pressure altitude and temperature.

The chart also includes the inverse of the square root of the density ratio (1/√s),
which is used to calculate KTAS by the relation:

KTAS = KCAS x 1/√s

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY PER-15


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Refer to Figure PER-8 for this exercise.

EXAMPLE

If the ambient temperature is –15° C and the pressure altitude is 6,000


feet, f ind the density altitude, 1/√s, and true airspeed for 100 KCAS.

SOLUTION

Enter the bottom of the chart at –15° C.

Move vertically upward to the 6,000 foot pressure altitude line.

From this point, move horizontally to the left and read a density al-
titude of 4,000 feet and move horizontally to the right and read 1/√s
equals 1.06.

True airspeed = KCAS x 1/√s = 100 x 1.06 = 106 KTAS.

PER-16 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

38
8) 1.80
,66 EXAMPLE: IF AMBIENT TEMP. IS –15°C 1
(11.0) 36 (10 1.78
,00
0 AND PRESSURE ALT. IS 6,000 FEET, ⋅σ
35 1.76
THE DENSITY ALT IS 4,000 FEET
34
1.74 AND 1 IS 1.06.
(10.0) 1.72
32 ⋅σ 1.70
1.68
.0) 1.66
30 44 1.64
(9.0)
0 (91 1.62
1.60
,00 1.58
28 30 1.56
.0) 1.54
(8.0) 20
26
0 (76 (m.
) 1.52
,00 FT 1.50
25 — 1.48
24 DE
DENSITY ALTITUDE FT. (m) X 1000

U 1.46
TIT 1.44
(7.0) ) E AL 1.42
22 .0 UR
96 S 1.40
60 ES
0( PR 1.38
20 ,00
(6.0) 20 1.36
1.34
18 1.32
.0) 1.30
(5.0) 72
16 45 1.28
0(
,00 1.26
15 1.24
14
(4.0) 1.22
12 .0) 1.20
48
0 (30 1.18
(3.0) 10 ,00 1.16
10 00
6,0 1.14
8 1.12
7,500 FT 1.115
.0) 1.10
(2.0) 24
6 ( 15
00 1.08
4,000 FT 4 5,0
1.06
(1.0) L)
E 1.04
EV
(0.5)
2 AL 1.02
(SE
0 1.00
.0) 0.98
24
(–0.5) –2 (–15
0 00 0.96
(–1.0) –4 –5,
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
15°
TEMPERATURE — °C
CONDITIONS:
OAT — 15°C
PA — 6,000 FT

Figure PER-8. Density Altitude Chart

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY PER-17


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

CRITICAL RELATIVE WIND AZIMUTHS CHART


The hover ceiling charts, discussed below, are based on adequate control
margins, both cyclic and antitorque, for relative winds up to 35 knots from
any direction at or below 3,000 feet HD. Improved control margins and/or
hover performance can be realized by avoiding winds from the critical azimuths
shown in the chart (Figure PER-9).

While not specif ically stated in the RFM, winds in excess of those shown in
RFM should be avoided to preclude loss of tail rotor effectiveness or insuf-
f icient aft cyclic control.

During all hovering operations, every attempt should be made to hover the
helicopter into the wind whenever possible.

PER-18 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL


30° NOTE:

1. Pedal critical wind


azimuth-hovering with the
see note relative wind within these
1 azimuth angles can result in
inability to maintain heading
due to large left pedal
requirements for certain
wind velocities.

270° 90° a. Inability to maintain


95° heading due to large left
pedal requirements for
certain wind velocities.

b. Reduction of available
left pedal control with
a directional AFCS
hardover.
see note
2 2. Longitudinal cyclic
critical wind azimuth—aft
cyclic may be limited with
longitudinal AFCS hardover.
180°

OGE CRITICAL RELATIVE WIND AZIMUTH


BH 412 HP AND EP

45°

see note
1

270° 90°

105°

see note
2

180°
IGE CRITICAL RELATIVE WIND AZIMUTH
BH 412, SP, HP, AND EP

Figure PER-9. Critical Relative Wind Azimuths

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY PER-19


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

HOVER CEILING CHARTS


HOVER CEILING—IGE
Adequate cyclic and directional control are available at the gross weights allowed
by the Hover Ceiling IGE charts in relative winds up to 35 knots from any di-
rection at or below 3,000 feet HD. Improved control margins will be achieved
by avoiding winds in the critical relative wind azimuth areas (Figure PER-9).

The Hover Ceiling In Ground Effect (IGE) charts (Figure PER-10) provide
the maximum allowable gross weights for hovering IGE at all pressure alti-
tude and outside air temperature conditions with heater on or off. Conversely,
the hover ceiling altitude can be determined for any given gross weight.

The IGE hover charts are based on both engines operating at 100% RPM, gen-
erators loaded no more than 150 amperes each, heater on or off and a 4-foot
skid height. Adequate cyclic and tail rotor pedal flight control margins exist
for winds up to 20 knots from any direction. Gross weight calculated from
the continuous power chart is considerably below that of the takeoff power
chart.

The charts can also be worked in reverse to determine the IGE hovering alti-
tude for a given helicopter gross weight.

PER-20 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

BELL 412—HP/EP
HOVER CEILING
IN GROUND EFFECT

POWER: SEE NOTE BELOW SKID HEIGHT 4 FEET


ENGINE RPM 100% (N2) HEATER ON OR OFF
GENERATOR 150 AMPS (EA.) – 40° TO 52°C

14,000 FT. DEN. ALT. LIMIT

NOTE: THESE IGE HOVER


CEILINGS ARE BASED ON
00

DENSITY ALTITUDE LIMITS FOR


,0
14

TAKEOFF AND LANDING. THIS


MAX OAT HEATER ON (21°C)

HELICOPTER CAN BE HOVERED


IGE AT THE INDICATED GROSS
00

WEIGHTS WITH LESS THAN


,0
12

TAKEOFF POWER AT ALL


TEMPERATURES.
0

MAX O
0
,0
10

AT
0
00

MAXIMUM GROSS
8,

WEIGHT LIMIT
0
00
6,

0
00

.
FT
4,


FE
A AL ,000

L D
VE ITU
2
LE T
SE RE

11.9
SU

00
,0
ES

-2

00
PR

,0
-4

–40 –30 –20 –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 8 9 10 11 12 LB X 1000


11,600
OAT — °C
3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.4 KG X 1000
GROSS WEIGHT

Figure PER-10. Hover Ceiling—In-Ground Effect

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY PER-21


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

HOVER CEILING —OGE


The Hover Ceiling charts (Figure PER-11) provide maximum weights for hov-
ering OGE at all pressure altitude and outside air temperature conditions with
heater on or off.

CAUTION

OGE hover operation may result in violation of


height–velocity limitations.

All of the OGE hover ceiling charts are divided into two areas as follows:

• AREA A (unshaded area) as shown on the hover ceiling charts pre-


sents hover performance for which satisfactory cyclic and directional
control have been demonstrated in relative winds of 35 knots from any
direction at or below 3000 feet HD. Improved control margins will be
achieved by avoiding winds in the critical relative wind azimuth areas.

• AREA B (shaded area) as shown on hover ceiling charts presents ad-


ditional hover performance which can be achieved in calm winds or
winds outside the critical relative wind azimuth areas.

NOTE
Tail rotor or cyclic control margin may preclude op-
eration in AREA B of the hover ceiling charts when
the relative wind is in the respective critical wind az-
imuth area.

Area B calculations provide higher gross weights which can be realized in


calm winds or winds outside the critical relative wind azimuth areas (Figure
PER-11).

If a wind in excess of those shown in RFM during OGE hover is from a crit-
ical azimuth, cyclic or tail rotor flight control margins may be limited and
may preclude safe OGE hovering operations.

PER-22 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

BELL 412—EP
HOVER CEILING
OUT OF GROUND EFFECT

MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS ENG POWER SKID HEIGHT 60 FEET


ENGINE RPM 100% HEATER OFF
GENERATOR 150 AMPS (EA.) 0° TO 52°C

CAUTION: OGE HOVER OPERATION MAY RESULT IN VIOLATION OF H-V


LIMITATIONS.
14,000 FT. DEN. ALT. LIMIT
00

OAT
,0
10

AR
EA

0°C
10°C
B
0
00

20°C
8,

0
00

MAX O

MAX
6,

30
OAT

°C
AT
0
00

40
4,

°C
0
00
2,

AREA A
50°
C
52°
0

C
T.
-F
DE
TU
TI
AL

0
00
RE

,
-2
SU
ES
PR

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 8 9 10 11 12 LB X 1000
11,200
OAT — °C
3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.4 KG X 1000
GROSS WEIGHT

Figure PER-11. Hover Ceiling—Out of Ground Effect

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY PER-23


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

TAKEOFF DISTANCE CHARTS


The Takeoff Distance charts (Figure PER-12) provide takeoff distances re-
quired to clear a 50-foot obstacle in a zero wind condition, using a takeoff
flight path which will avoid the critical areas of the Height–Velocity diagram.
Takeoff is initiated from a hover at 4-feet skid height with climbout speed of
45 knots.

NOTE
Downwind takeoffs are not recommended because the
published takeoff distance performance cannot be
achieved.

Two takeoff distance charts are provided: one for over a 50-foot obstacle and
the other for over a 15-meter obstacle. These charts allow the pilot to calcu-
late the distance required to clear a 50-foot obstacle during a takeoff flight
path from a 4-foot hover using hover power plus 15% torque. The chart is based
on a zero wind condition, 45-KIAS takeoff climbout speed (V TOCS ), and a
flight path which avoids the critical areas of the height-velocity diagram.
Takeoff distance performance cannot be achieved if the takeoff is downwind
(Figure PER-12).

PER-24 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

BELL 412EP
TAKEOFF DISTANCE
OVER 50 FOOT OBSTACLE
HOVER POWER + 15% TORQUE INITIATED FROM 4 FT SKID HEIGHT
ENGINE RPM 100% (N2) VTOCS = 45 KIAS
GENERATOR 150 AMPS (EA) HEATER ON OR OFF

14,000 FT. DEN. ALT. LIMIT


000

MAXIMUM
12,

GROSS WEIGHT
FOR TAKEOFF
0
,00
10

MAX
00

OAT
8,0

7,000
00

8,000
9,000
6,0

MIN
00
00

10,0

OAT
4,0

00
,0

lb
00

11


00

0 HT
2,0

0
,9
,6

IG
F T.

11 E
11

W
SS

RO
.
DE
S. L

G
TU
LTIA
RE
U
ESS
00
PR
–2,0

MAX OAT
HEATER ON
(21°C)
–60 –40 –20 0 20 40 60 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400
930 FT
OAT — °C TAKEOFF DISTANCE—FT

Figure PER-12. Takeoff Distance Chart - English (Sheet 1 of 2)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY PER-25


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

BELL 412EP (METRIC)


TAKEOFF DISTANCE
OVER 15 METER OBSTACLE
HOVER POWER + 15% TORQUE INITIATED FROM 1.2 METER SKID HEIGHT
ENGINE RPM 100% (N2) VTOCS = 45 KIAS
GENERATOR 150 AMPS (EA) HEATER ON OR OFF

14,000 METER DEN. ALT. LIMIT


0
400
0
350

MAXIMUM
GROSS WEIGHT
FOR TAKEOFF

3000
0
300

3500
0
250

4000
0
200

MIN
MAX OAT
0

OAT
450
0
150

00
50
0
100

53 262

kg

98
5

HT
500

E IG
W
m

S

OS
DE
.
S. L

GR
TU
LTI
–50 RE A
U
0
SS

MAX OAT
E
PR

HEATER ON
(21°C)

–60 –40 –20 0 20 40 60 100 200 300 400


OAT — °C TAKEOFF DISTANCE—m

Figure PER-12. Takeoff Distance Chart - Metric (Sheet 2 of 2)

PER-26 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

TWIN-ENGINE RATE-OF-CLIMB CHARTS


The Twin Engine Rate of Climb charts provide the rates of climb that can be
obtained at all outside air temperatures/pressure altitudes/gross weight com-
binations with heater on or off at maximum continuous power and takeoff power.

NOTE
All rate of climb data are based on changes in true
altitude (pressure altitude corrected for nonstandard
temperature).

The twin-engine rate-of-climb charts allow the pilot to determine the heli-
copter's rate of climb. The charts differ by gross weight, if the heater is on or
off, and if takeoff power or maximum continuous power is used. All charts
are based on both engines operating at 100% N 2 , generators loaded to not more
than 150 amperes each, and 70 KIAS with the doors on and closed. The chart
headings also include airspeed and ROC adjustment for climb with the heli-
copter's doors open or removed.

SINGLE-ENGINE RATE-OF-CLIMB CHARTS


The Single Engine Rate of Climb charts (Figure PER-13) provide the rates
of climb that can be obtained at all outside air temperatures/pressure alti-
tudes/gross weight combinations with heater off at maximum continuous
power and 30-minute OEI power.

NOTE
Published single engine performance is intended for
emergency use only when one engine becomes in-
operative due to an actual malfunction. Routine op-
eration in excess of published twin engine operating
limits can affect engine service life.

The charts differ depending on gross weight and if 30-minute OEI power or
maximum continuous power is used. All charts are based on doors on and closed,
one engine operating at 97 % N 2, its generator loaded to 150 amperes, the other
engine secured, the heater off, and 70 KIAS. The chart headings also include
airspeed and ROC adjustments for climb with the helicopter's doors open or
removed.

Single-engine performance is provided for emergency use only. Positive rates


of climb are very low for the lightest gross weights and nonexistent or neg-
ative for heavier gross weights.

Since a zero rate of climb is the same as level flight, the single-engine rate-
of-climb charts can be used to determine the pressure altitude and/or maxi-
mum gross weight that can be maintained in level flight if an engine fails. This
calculation can be very important if operating in high, mountainous terrain.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY PER-27


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

BELL 412EP
SINGLE-ENGINE RATE-OF-CLIMB
GROSS WEIGHT 10,000 LB (4536 KG)

MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS POWER 70 KIAS


ENGINE RPM 97% (N2) HEATER OFF
GENERATOR 150 AMPS INOPERATIVE ENGINE SECURED

WITH ALL DOORS OPEN OR REMOVED: 1. CLIMB SPEED IS 60 KIAS.


2. RATE OF CLIMB WILL DECREASE 275 FT./MIN.
20,000
6000
OAT
-20°C
18,000 -30°C 5500
TWIN ENGINE M C P -40°C
ABSOLUTE CEILING 5000
16,000

4500

PRESSURE ALTITUDE – METERS


14,000
PRESSURE ALTITUDE – FEET

4000

12,000
3500

10,000 3000
-10
°C

2500
8,000
0°C

OAT LIMIT
10°

2000
C

6,000
20°

1500
C
30°

4,000
C

1000
40°

2,000
C

500
50
°C

0
-2000 -1600 -1200 -800 -400 0 400 800 1200
RATE OF CLIMB – FEET/MINUTE
(-10.0) (-8.0) (-6.0) (-4.0) (-2.0) (0) (2.0) (4.0) (6.0)
RATE OF CLIMB – (METERS/SECOND)

Figure PER-13. Single-Engine Rate-of-Climb Chart

PER-28 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

LANDING DISTANCE
The Single Engine Landing Distance chart (Figure PER-14) provides the
landing distance required to clear a 50-foot (15-meter) obstacle for all out-
side air temperatures, pressure altitudes, and gross weights. Landing distances
are based on an approach condition of 45 KIAS and 500 feet per minute rate
of descent, zero wind.

SINGLE ENGINE LANDING DISTANCE


OVER 50 FT. (15 M) OBSTACLE
21/2 MINUTE OEI 45 KIAS
POWER AS REQUIRED RATE OF DESCENT 500 FT/M
ENGINE RPM 97% HARD SURFACED RUNWAY
GENERATOR 150 AMPS INOPERATIVE ENGINE SECURED

14,000 FT. DEN. ALT. LIMIT


0 00
14,
0 00
12,

MAX. OAT
0 00
10,
00
8,0
00

MIN.
OAT
6,0
00
4,0
00

LANDING DISTANCE
2,0

ALL GROSS WEIGHTS


FT
E–
EL
LEV

TUD
SEA

LTI
EA
0
PR -2,00
UR
ESS

–40 –20 0 20 40 60 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 FEET


OAT — °C METERS
50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
LANDING DISTANCE

Figure PER-14. Single-Engine Landing Distance Chart

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY PER-29


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

AIRSPEED CALIBRATION CHART


The single airspeed calibration chart allows the pilot to calculate calibrated
versus indicated airspeeds for climb, level flight, and autorotation. This chart
can be used in conjunction with the true airspeed factor obtained from the den-
sity altitude chart to convert KIAS to KCAS to KTAS.

The Airspeed Calibration chart (Figure PER-15) provides calibrated air-


speeds for all indicated airspeeds during level flight, climb, and autorotation.

PILOT AND COPILOT AIRSPEED


SYSTEM CALIBRATION
CLIMB, LEVEL FLIGHT, AUTOROTATION

SKID GEAR KIAS — ERROR = KCAS


160

140
LEVEL FLIGHT
CALIBRATED AIRSPEED — KNOTS

120

100
AUTOROTATION

80
CLIMB

60

40

20

0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
INDICATED AIRSPEED — KNOTS

Figure PER-15. Airspeed Calibration Chart

PER-30 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

MOST EFFICIENT AIRSPEED


While never specif ically mentioned in the RFM, numerous performance
charts and procedures are based on the helicopter's most eff icient airspeed.
Among these are the rate-of-climb and fuel flow vs airspeed charts and the
airspeed for engine failure procedure.

Helicopter flight produces three forms of drag: prof ile drag associated with
rotation of the rotor systems through the air, induced drag which occurs when
the rotor system produces lift, and parasite drag that develops when the non-
lift producing parts of the helicopter are moved through the air. Each form of
drag requires a corresponding form of power to overcome the drag effects
(Figure PER-16).

Prof ile power overcomes prof ile drag and remains fairly constant through-
out the helicopter flight envelope.

Induced power required is very high during hovering, when the rotor must pro-
duce all its own lift, and increases very slightly just before the helicopter enters
translational lift. After translational lift, the induced airflow through the rotor
as a result of forward airspeed reduces the need for induced power signif icantly.

In a hover there is no parasite drag from the fuselage. However, as forward


flight airspeed increases, so does parasite drag, and the requirement for par-
asite power increases proportionally.

The helicopter’s most eff icient airspeed is that at which the sum total of all
three types of power is the lowest.

100%

90%

80% INDUCED POWER

70%

P 60%
O PARASITE POWER
W 50%
E
R 40%

30%

20%

10%
PROFILE POWER

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150

AIRSPEED

Figure PER-16. Power Required (Typical)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY PER-31


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

NOISE LEVELS
This aircraft is certif ied as a Stage 2 helicopter as prescribed in FAR Part
36, Subpart H, for gross weights up to and including the certif icated maxi-
mum takeoff and landing weight of 11,900 pounds (5,398 kilograms). There
are no operating limitations in meeting the takeoff, flyover, or approach
noise requirements.

The following noise levels comply with FAR Part 36, Appendix H, Stage 2 noise
level requirements. They were obtained by analysis of approved data from
noise tests conducted under the provisions of FAR Part 36, Amendment 36-14.

The certif ied noise levels are:

Flight Condition EPNL (EPNdB)


Takeoff 92.8
Flyover 93.4
Approach 95.6

NOTE
No determination has been made by the Federal
Aviation Administration that the noise levels of this
aircraft are or should be acceptable or unacceptable
for operation at, into, or out of any airport.

V H is def ined as the airspeed in level flight obtained using the minimum
specification engine torque corresponding to maximum continuous power avail-
able for sea level 25° C ambient conditions at the relevant maximum certif i-
cated weight. The value of V H thus def ined for this helicopter is 122 KTAS.
The test and analysis procedures used to obtain these noise levels are es-
sentially equivalent to those required by the International Civil Aviation
Organization (ICAO) in Annex 16, Volume 1, Chapter 8. Approval is ap-
plicable only after endorsement by the Civil Aviation Authority of the
country of aircraft registration.

PER-32 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

CATEGORY A OPERATIONS
Most Bell 412EPs are operated under FAR Part 29 Category B operations, and
the majority of the RFM limitations and performance charts are based on
Category B.

Category A helicopter operation may be required if:

• The helicopter is operating under a FAR Part 133, 135, or 127 certif icate.

• The responsible FAA principal operations inspector requires the cer-


tif icate holder to follow Category A operations for certain types of
helicopter flights.

• The party owning, operating, or hiring the helicopter requires that the
flight should be conducted under Category A.

Category A operation increases margins of safety during the takeoff and


landing/approach phases of flight. Category A does not increase helicopter
safety itself, but rather safety in the way it is operated in all phases of flight.

Briefly, Category A requires helicopter operation in such a manner that if an


engine fails during takeoff or landing approach, either a safe landing or
climbing and attaining single-engine forward flight is possible. The increased
safety is achieved by signif icantly reducing maximum gross weight and max-
imum altitude for takeoff and landing and by increasing takeoff and landing
distances required.

For example, given an OAT of 40°C (104°F) at a pressure altitude of 4,000


feet, the Category B maximum gross weight for takeoff and landing is 10,500
pounds. Under the same conditions, the maximum gross weight for Category
A operations is only 8,020 pounds. The large reduction in takeoff and land-
ing gross weight substantially increases the margin of safety if an engine should
fail (Figure PER-17).

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY PER-33


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

WEIGHT — ALTITUDE — TEMPERATURE FOR TAKEOFF AND LANDING


VTOSS = 40 KIAS PART A GW TO 10,000 LBS (4536 kg)

4,000

20
°C
MA
25
°C
XO

30
°C
3,000
AT
PRESSURE ALTITUDE~FEET

35
°C
40
°C
2,000
45
°C

1,000

0
50

51
°C
M

.7
°C
AX
O
AT

–1,000
74 76 78 80 82 84 86 88 90 92 94 96 98 100 ~ lb X 100

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 ~ kg X 100
8020 LB
GROSS WEIGHT

Figure PER-17. Category A Operations

FUEL FLOW vs AIRSPEED


The fuel flow vs airspeed charts may be used to obtain approximate fuel
flow based on KTAS or KIAS. Since these charts are based on limited test
data, actual fuel consumption may vary according to external factors. The
f igures calculated should not be used as a def inite standard for fuel con-
sumption (Figure PER-18).

Each fuel flow vs airspeed charts is based on a different pressure altitude


and OAT. Since not all combinations of pressure altitude and OAT are in-
cluded and the effects of bleed air and drag from additional equipment are
not accounted for, it is recommended that pilots establish their own mea-
surements of fuel flow. Adjustment charts are included for the effects of
pop-out floats.

PER-34 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


PERFORMANCE
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

FUEL FLOW VS AIRSPEED


TWIN ENGINE OPERATION ZERO WIND

PRESSURE ALTITUDE = 2000 FEET


OAT = +11°C
∆ FUEL FLOW—100 LB/HR

20
∆ TORQUE—%Q

3 FUEL FLOW INCREASE FOR POP-OUT FLOATS

2
10
1

0 0
60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140
TRUE AIRSPEED—KNOTS
90 8
XMSN LIM
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
80

70 7
FUEL FLOW—100 LB/HR

LB
60 000
—1
GW
12
TORQUE—%Q

LRC
50 6 11
10
9
40 8
5 7
30
MAX END
VNE

20 4

10
3
60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140
TRUE AIRSPEED—KNOTS

60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140


INDICATED AIRSPEED—KNOTS 412099-6-5

Figure PER-18. Fuel Flow vs Airspeed Charts

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY PER-35


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

CREW RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

CONTENTS

Page
WHAT IS CREW RESOURCE MANAGEMENT?...................... CRM-1
SITUATIONAL AWARENESS...................................................... CRM-1

CRM
COMMAND AND LEADERSHIP................................................ CRM-3
COMMUNICATION PROCESS ................................................... CRM-4
Communication Techniques: Inquiry, Advocacy,
and Assertion ........................................................................ CRM-5
DECISION-MAKING PROCESS ................................................. CRM-6

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY CRM-i


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

ILLUSTRATIONS

Figure Title Page


CRM-1 Situational Awareness in the Cockpit ...................... CRM-2
CRM-2 Command and Leadership ........................................ CRM-3
CRM-3 Communication Process .......................................... CRM-4
CRM-4 Decision-Making Process ........................................ CRM-6

CRM

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY CRM-iii


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

CREW RESOURCE MANAGEMENT


WHAT IS CREW RESOURCE MANAGEMENT?
According to the Federal Aviation Administration, Crew Resource Management
(CRM) is described as “the effective use of all resources to achieve safe and
efficient flight operations.” In practice, CRM is a set of competencies designed
to enhance safety and reduce human error. Resources can include, but are not
limited to, additional crewmembers, maintenance technicians, flight attendants,
air traff ic controllers, dispatchers and schedulers, and line service personel.
CRM was not designed to usurp the authority of the pilot in command; rather,

CRM
it was developed as a means to assist with situational awareness and decision
making to increase safety margins and achieve accident- and incident-free flight
operations.

Most experts agree that a highly coordinated crew using a standardized set
of procedures is more likely to avoid and identify errors. Effective commu-
nication and the use of brief ing and debrief ing are tools that can be used to
build the “team concept” and maintain situational awareness. Utilizing a
standard set of callouts provides a means to incorporate CRM. Standardization
keeps all crewmembers “in the loop” and provides an opportunity to detect
an error early on, before it has an opportunity to build into an accident chain.

Prof iciency in CRM requires all crewmembers to have a working knowledge


of how to maintain situational awareness, techniques for optimum decision
making, desirable leadership and followership characteristics, cross-check-
ing and monitoring techniques, means of fatigue and stress management, and
communication.

CRM training is an important part of your FlightSafety training experience.


Throughout your training event, your instructor will provide general CRM
guidance as well as identify CRM issues, philosophies, and techniques that
are specif ic to the aircraft you fly. To assist with this, the FlightSafety CRM
model has been incorporated into this training guide. The model can be used
as a guide or a refresher on how to incorporate CRM principles into your day-
to-day line operations. This model is not intended to replace a formalized course
of CRM instruction, and attendance at a CRM-specif ic course is highly
recommended.

SITUATIONAL AWARENESS
Situational awareness is a fundamental CRM concept. Often described as
“knowing what’s going on around you,” the loss of situational awareness is
often identif ied as a causal factor in an incident or accident. Collective
situational awareness is a measurement of the total situational awareness
among all members involved in the operation. To maintain a high level of col-
lective situational awareness open, timely, and accurate communication is
required. In the situational awareness model two-way arrows represent the two-
way communication that must occur between the pilot flying and the pilot
monitoring. Each pilot contributes to collective situational awareness.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY CRM-1


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Circumstances will sometimes present clues that situational awareness is


becoming impaired. These “behavioral markers” are listed under clues to
identifying loss of situational awareness. As the number of these clues increases,
the chance of losing situational awareness increases as well. Maintaining
situational awareness requires a constant state of vigilance. Complacency has
often been the precursor to a loss of situational awareness (Figure CRM-1).

SITUATIONAL AWARENESS IN THE COCKPIT

Events that
PILOT PILOT may happen
FLYING MONITORING
CRM

(PF) (PM)

SA

COLLECTIVE Events that Events that


SA have are
happened happening
now

CLUES TO IDENTIFYING:
• Loss of Situational Awareness
• Links in the Error Chain

1. FAILURE TO MEET TARGETS


OPERATIONAL

2. UNDOCUMENTED PROCEDURE
3. DEPARTURE FROM SOP
4. VIOLATING MINIMUMS OR LIMITATIONS
5. FAILURE TO MONITOR

6. COMMUNICATIONS
7. AMBIGUITY
8. UNRESOLVED DISCREPANCIES
HUMAN

9. PREOCCUPATION OR DISTRACTION
10. CONFUSION OR EMPTY FEELING
11. NEED TO HURRY / LAST MINUTE CHANGES
12. FATIGUE

Figure CRM-1. Situational Awareness in the Cockpit

CRM-2 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

COMMAND AND LEADERSHIP


Command and leadership are not synonymous. The status “pilot in command”
is designated by an organization. Command responsibility can’t be shared with
other crewmembers. Leadership, on the other hand, is a role that can be
shared. Effective leadership should focus on “what’s right,” not on “who’s right.”

Leadership styles range from “autocratic” to “laissez-faire.” An autocratic lead-


ership style exercises a high degree of control and allows a low degree of
participation from team members in reaching decisions. A laissez-faire
leadership style exercises a low degree of control and allows a high degree
of participation from team members. Effective leaders tend to be less extreme,

CRM
relying on either authoritarian or democratic leadership styles (Figure CRM- 2).

There is no “ideal” or “best” leadership style. An immediate crisis might require


fairly strict leadership, to ensure stability and to reassure other crewmembers,
while other situations might be handled more effectively by encouraging
crew participation in the decision- making process.

COMMAND AND LEADERSHIP


LEADERSHIP STYLES
VARY WITH SITUATION

LAISSEZ-
AUTOCRATIC AUTHORITARIAN DEMOCRATIC
FAIRE

PARTICIPATION

LOW HIGH
Command — Designated by Organization
— Cannot be Shared
Leadership — Shared among Crewmembers
— Focuses on “What’s right,” not “Who’s right”

Figure CRM-2. Command and Leadership

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY CRM-3


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

COMMUNICATION PROCESS
Communication is the most important tool for maintaining situational aware-
ness. Effective communication requires the ability to provide appropriate
information, at the appropriate time, to the appropriate person (Figure CRM-
3). Communication may be verbal (aural) or written. Written communications
in the cockpit include symbolic messages and indications that are electroni-
cally transmitted and displayed.

As illustrated on the CRM Blue Card, some elements are common to most
cockpit communications:
• An event occurs, creating a need to communicate. The event may be
CRM

a change in the status of some operational goal, such as rate of descent.


• A sender observes the event.
• The sender transmits a message to a receiver, conveying occurrence
of the event.
• The receiver transmits feedback to the sender, acknowledging the
message.
• The receiver’s feedback may include an additional message, confirming
the intended corrective action, or instructing the sender to continue
monitoring the operational goal.

COMMUNICATION PROCESS

ASSERTION:
OPERATIONAL • Reach a conclusion
NEED SEND RECEIVE GOAL

ADVOCACY:
• Increase collective SA

INQUIRY:
• Increase individual SA
FEEDBACK
• Support Conclusions with Facts
• State Position, Suggest Solutions
• Clear, Concise Questions
— THINK—
• Solicit and give feedback • Maintain focus on the goal
• Listen carefully • Verify operational outcome is achieved
• Focus on behavior, not people • Be aware of barriers to communication

— REMEMBER —
Questions enhance communication flow
Don’t give in to the temptation to ask questions when Assertion is required
Use of Inquiry or Advocacy should raise a “red flag”.

Figure CRM-3. Communication Process

CRM-4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Barriers to communication limit our ability to maintain situational awareness.

As illustrated on the Blue Card, internal (or personal) communication barri-


ers can diminish our perception of the need to communicate. An observer who
is distracted, for example, may fail to detect a change in the status of an
operational goal. Internal barriers can also inhibit a sender’s willingness to
communicate, or affect a receiver’s acceptance and interpretation of a trans-
mitted message.

External communication barriers, such as overcrowded radio frequencies, can


interfere with the sender’s ability to transmit a message, or with the receiver’s
ability to transmit feedback. Differences in language or dialect can also

CRM
become external barriers to communication.

CRM provides three techniques for overcoming communication barriers:


• Inquiry—A technique for increasing your own situational awareness
• Advocacy—A technique for increasing someone else’s awareness
• Assertion—A technique for getting your point across

When conflict on the flight deck interferes with communication, it usually


originates from one pilot’s tendency to make “solo” decisions. Avoid this kind
of conflict by focusing your questions and comments on WHAT is right,
rather than on WHO is right.

COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUES: INQUIRY, ADVOCACY,


AND ASSERTION
Inquiry, advocacy, and assertion can be effectively used in the aviation
environment to help solve communication problems.

Each item is a step in the process. The steps provide a metaphor that empha-
sizes the principle of escalation. In other words, a person must f irst practice
inquiry, then advocacy, then assertion.

A person practicing assertiveness is not trying to be insubordinate or


disrespectful; rather, assertion is an expression of the fact that a level of
discomfort exists with a particular situation. Assertion is an attempt to seek
resolution.

The goal of inquiry is to increase individual situational awareness, the goal


of advocacy is to increase collective situational awareness, and the goal of
assertion is to reach a conclusion.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY CRM-5


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

DECISION-MAKING PROCESS
Aeronautical decision making (ADM) provides a systematic approach to risk
assessment. It is a tool you can use to select the best response for a given set
of circumstances. FlightSafety recommends the decision-making process
illustrated on the second page of the Blue Card (Figure CRM-4). This
continuous- loop process includes eight steps:

1. Recognize the need for a decision.


2. Identify the problem and def ine it in terms of time and risk.
3. Collect facts.
CRM

4. Identify alternative responses to the need.


5. Weigh the impact of each alternative response.
6. Select a response.
7. Implement that response.
8. Evaluate the effects of your response.

DECISION MAKING PROCESS

HINTS: EVALUATE
RESULT
• Identify the problem: RECOGNIZE
– Communicate it NEED
– Achieve agreement
– Obtain commitment IDENTIFY
AND
• Consider appropriate SOPs IMPLEMENT DEFINE
PROBLEM
• Think beyond the obvious alternatives RESPONSE
• Make decisions as a result of the process ACCELERATED
RESPONSE COLLECT
• Resist the temptation to make an immediate FACTS
decision and then support it with facts
SELECT A IDENTIFY
RESPONSE ALTERNATIVES

WEIGH IMPACT
OF ALTERNATIVES

Figure CRM-4. Decision-Making Process

CRM-6 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

SYSTEMS REVIEW

CONTENTS
Page
INTRODUCTION ....................................................................... SRE-1
HELICOPTER DESCRIPTION ................................................ SRE-1
Principal dimensions ............................................................. SRE-1
Location references ............................................................... SRE-1
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT ................................................. SRE-5
Crew Compartment ................................................................ SRE-5
Passenger & Cargo Compartment........................................ SRE-6
Baggage Compartment .......................................................... SRE-6
INSTRUMENT PANEL and CONSOLES ............................... SRE-7

SYSTEMS
ROTOR SYSTEMS ..................................................................... SRE-8

REVIEW
Main Rotor .............................................................................. SRE-8
Tail Rotor................................................................................. SRE-8
TRANSMISSION ....................................................................... SRE-9
HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS .......................................................... SRE-9
FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM .............................................. SRE-10
FORCE TRIM SYSTEM ......................................................... SRE-10
PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM........................................................ SRE-11
AUXILIARY SYSTEMS ......................................................... SRE-12
Heating System .................................................................... SRE-12
Ventilating System .............................................................. SRE-12
Lighting Systems ................................................................. SRE-12
Windshield Wipers .............................................................. SRE-13
Intercommunications System ............................................ SRE-13
Rotor Brake........................................................................... SRE-13

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY SRE-i


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT ................................................ SRE-13


Fire Detection System......................................................... SRE-13
Engine Fire Extinguishing System ................................... SRE-14
Portable Fire Extinguishers................................................ SRE-14
First Aid Kit.......................................................................... SRE-14
Emergency Exits .................................................................. SRE-14
OVERTORQUE WARNING SYSTEM ................................. SRE-15
TRANSMISSION ..................................................................... SRE-15
POWERPLANT ........................................................................ SRE-17
FUEL SYSTEM ........................................................................ SRE-19
Description ........................................................................... SRE-19
Fuel System Electrical ........................................................ SRE-24
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ...................................................... SRE-28
DC Electrical ........................................................................ SRE-28
SYSTEMS
REVIEW

AC Electrical ........................................................................ SRE-34


FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM .............................................. SRE-36
Force Trim System............................................................... SRE-36
Force Trim Controls ............................................................ SRE-36
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) ...................... SRE-37
AFCS Controls ..................................................................... SRE-38
AFCS Indicators .................................................................. SRE-39
AL-300 Air Data Display ................................................... SRE-40
CAUTION PANEL and ADVISORY LIGHTS ..................... SRE-40
VOICE/FLIGHT DATA RECORDER ................................... SRE-43
DIGITAL CLOCK .................................................................... SRE-44

SRE-ii FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

ILLUSTRATIONS

Figure Title Page


SRE-1 Principal Dimensions .................................................. SRE-2
SRE-2 Transmission Oil System Schematic......................... SRE-8
SRE-3 Hourmeter Panel—Three Chip Indicators ........... SRE-15
SRE-3A Hourmeter Panel—Four Chip Indicators .......... SRE-16
SRE-4 Collective Control Panel ......................................... SRE-18
SRE-5 Airframe Fuel Storage System ............................... SRE-20
SRE-6 Underfloor Fuel Cell Components ......................... SRE-21
SRE-7 Fuel Burn Sequence ................................................. SRE-22
SRE-8 Fuel Transfer Caution Light Diagram ................... SRE-26
SRE-9 Electrical System ...................................................... SRE-29

SYSTEMS
REVIEW
SRE-10 Essential Bus Distribution .................................... SRE-31
SRE-11 Emergency Bus Distribution ................................ SRE-32
SRE-12 AC Electrical System............................................. SRE-35
SRE-13 Detent Switch Caution Lights .............................. SRE-40
SRE-14 3-Axis DAFCS Schematic .................................... SRE-42
SRE-15 Digital Clock Display ............................................ SRE-44

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY SRE-iii


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

SYSTEMS REVIEW
INTRODUCTION
The helicopter, its primary and auxiliary systems, and emergency equipment
are described within this section.

HELICOPTER DESCRIPTION
The Bell Helicopter Textron Model 412 is a twin-engine, f ifteen-place heli-
copter with a single four-bladed main rotor system and a tail rotor to provide
directional control.

The airframe is a semimonocoque structure with metal and f iberglass cover-


ing. Two longitudinal main beams and the pylon support structure provide pri-
mary support.

Skid-type landing gear is aff ixed below the fuselage. Optional skid-mounted
emergency pop-out flotation gear is available.

SYSTEMS
REVIEW
PRINCIPAL DIMENSIONS
Principal exterior dimensions are shown in Figure SRE-1. All height dimen-
sions must be considered approximate due to variations in loading and alight-
ing gear deflection.

LOCATION REFERENCES
Locations on and within the helicopter can be determined in relation to fuse-
lage stations, waterlines, and buttock lines, measured in inches from known
reference points.

Fuselage Stations
Fuselage stations (FS or sta.) are vertical planes perpendicular to, and mea-
sured along, the longitudinal axis of the helicopter. Station zero is the ref-
erence datum plane and is 20 inches (508 millimeters) aft of the nose of
the helicopter.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY SRE-1


REVIEW
SYSTEMS

SRE-2
46 FT
(14 M)
2 FT 7 IN.
(777 MM)

4 FT 8 IN. 9 FT 4 IN.
(1.4 M) (2.8 M)

1 FT 2 IN.
(360 MM)
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

4 FT 7 IN. 12 FT 1.2 IN.


(1.4 M) (4.0 M)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


Figure SRE-1. Principal Dimensions (Sheet 1 of 3)
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

NOTES:
VERTICAL DIMENSIONS ARE FOR HELICOPTERS
6 FT 8 IN. AT 11,900 POUNDS (5,262 KILOGRAMS)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


(2.0 M) GROSS WEIGHT. VERTICAL DIMENSIONS WILL
INCREASE APPROXIMATELY 3.3 INCHES
(83.8 MILLIMETERS) WHEN HELICOPTER IS EMPTY.

9 FT 4 IN.
(2.8 M)

Figure SRE-1. Principal Dimensions (Sheet 2 of 3)

SRE-3
SYSTEMS
REVIEW
REVIEW
SYSTEMS

SRE-4
56 FT 2 IN.
(17.1 M)
45 FT 11 IN.
(14 M) 41 FT 8 IN.
(12.7 M)
12 FT 10 IN.
(3.9 M)

8 FT 7 IN.
(2.6 M)

10 FT 10 IN.
(3.3 M) 1 FT 5 IN.
(423 MM)
5 FT 1 IN.
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

(1.5 M)

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


15 FT 1 IN.
1 FT 3 IN. (4.6 M)
11 FT 5 IN. (393 MM)
(3.5 M)

Figure SRE-1. Principal Dimensions (Sheet 3 of 3)


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Waterlines
Waterlines (WL) are horizontal planes perpendicular to, and measured along,
the vertical axis of the helicopter. Waterline zero is a reference plane located
7.4 inches (188 millimeters) below the lowest point of the fuselage.

Buttock Lines
Buttock lines (BL) are vertical planes perpendicular to, and measured to the
left and right along the lateral axis of the helicopter. Buttock line zero is the
plane at the longitudinal centerline of the helicopter.

GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
The fuselage forward section contains the nose compartment for electrical and
avionics equipment, the crew compartment, the passenger/cargo compartment,
and the lower fuel cells. The center section incorporates the transmission com-
partment, the pylon support structure, and the upper fuel cells. The aft sec-
tion of the fuselage houses the left and right engines, the combining gearbox
and oil coolers, and has compartments for avionics, AFCS computers, the bleed-
air heater, and optional equipment components.

SYSTEMS
REVIEW
The tailboom is attached to the aft end of the fuselage and supports the tail
rotor and drive train, vertical f in, horizontal stabilizer/elevator, and tail skid.
A baggage compartment is located in the forward end of the tailboom.

CREW COMPARTMENT
The crew compartment or cockpit occupies the forward part of the cabin. The
pilot station is on the right side, and the copilot/forward passenger station is
on the left.

The instrument panel extends across the front of the cockpit and is tilted up-
ward slightly for more direct viewing of the instruments. An overhead con-
sole is centered on the cabin roof, and a floor-mounted pedestal is located
between the crew seats.

A door on either side permits direct access to the crew compartment. Large
glass windshields and clear acrylic windows in the crew doors, roof, and lower
nose area allow good visibility from the crew compartment.

Crew Seats
The pilot and copilot seats are designed for energy attenuation to absorb ver-
tical impact loads in the event of a hard landing. Adjustment handles located
beneath the right side of each seat can be pulled to adjust seats 4.0 inches (10.2
centimeters) vertically and 4.5 inches (11.4 centimeters) longitudinally. Each
crew seat is equipped with a lap seatbelt and a dual shoulder harness with in-
ertial reel, which locks in the event of 3g rapid deceleration.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY SRE-5


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

PASSENGER & CARGO COMPARTMENT


The aft area of the cabin contains a space of 220 cubic feet (6.2 cubic meters)
for the carriage of passengers or internal cargo.

Thirteen passengers can be accommodated when the optional passenger seat


kit is installed.

A large sliding door and a hinged panel on either side of the cabin provide
full, direct access to the passenger/cargo compartment. Large acrylic win-
dows in the doors allow outside viewing from any seat.

Passenger Seats
The passenger seats are arranged in a row of four seats facing aft, another row
of f ive seats facing forward, and a pair of seats facing outboard from either
side of the pylon support structure. All seats are equipped with lap seatbelts,
shoulder harnesses, and inertial reels, and are designed for energy attenua-
tion to absorb vertical impact loads in the event of a hard landing.

Tiedowns and Equipment Fittings


SYSTEMS
REVIEW

Fifty-f ive tiedown rings and eighty-nine studs are recessed into the cabin deck
for securing internal cargo, passenger seats, and other optional equipment kits,
such as internal hoists, litters, etc. Fourteen additional studs are incorporated
into the cabin roof for attachment of optional equipment.

The deck-mounted tiedown f ittings have an airframe structural capacity of


1,250 pounds (567.0 kilograms) vertical and 500 pounds (226.8 kilograms)
horizontal per f itting.

Provisions for installation of cargo tiedown f ittings are incorporated in the


aft cabin bulkhead and transmission support structure. Each tiedown point
has an airframe structural capacity of 1,250 pounds (567.0 kilograms) at 90
degrees to the bulkhead and 500 pounds (226.8 kilograms) in any direction
parallel to the bulkhead.

BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT
The baggage compartment is located in the forward end of the tailboom and
has a capacity of 28 cubic feet (0.8 cubic meter). The compartment can carry
up to 400 pounds (181 kilograms) of baggage or other cargo, which can be
secured using the twenty tiedown f ittings provided.

The access door is on the right side of the tailboom and is provided with a
key lock for security of baggage compartment contents.

SRE-6 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Two interior lights illuminate the baggage compartment when the door is open.
The DOOR LOCK caution light illuminates on the caution panel when the door
is not properly latched.

A smoke detector is installed in the compartment and is connected to the BAG-


GAGE FIRE warning light on the instrument panel.

INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONSOLES


The instrument panel, which consists of three separate sections, extends
across the front of the cockpit. It is tilted slightly to provide better viewing
of the instruments by the flight crew.

The flight instruments are mounted in the section in front of the pilot’s seat.
The system’s instruments and the caution panel are mounted in the center sec-
tion of the panel. Optional copilot flight instruments are mounted in the sec-
tion in front of the left seat.

The collective control panel mounts engine switches used during starting and
shutdown, landing light and searchlight control switches, and optional
equipment switches.

SYSTEMS
REVIEW
The pedestal, located between the two crew seats, supports the avionics con-
trol heads, and engine and flight control system switches. A case for stowage
of the helicopter logbook, maps, and other data is incorporated into the
pedestal.

The hourmeter panel is located at the base of the pedestal on the right side.
It supports the hourmeter, transmission chip indicators (XMSN CHIP IND),
and the battery bus circuit breakers (NO. 1 BUS BAT and NO. 2 BUS BAT).
The hourmeter records aircraft operating time in hours and tenths. The trans-
mission chip indicators provide an indication to maintenance personnel that
the transmission chip caution light (XMSN CHIP) had illuminated and where
the chip occurred. To reset the indicator, rotate the outer portion 60 degrees
clockwise.

The Dual Digital AFCS EEPROM READ and ERASE switches are located
on the console just aft of the hourmeter panel.

The overhead console mounts electrical system switches and circuit breakers.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY SRE-7


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

JET 8 CAUTION PANEL


PRESS
VENT SW XMSN OIL PRESS
PRESS
CHIP XMTR
DETECTOR JET 1
JET 2 (AND TWO
AUXILIARY JETS)
CAUTION PANEL
JET 7
CHIP
DETECTOR TEMP SW
XMSN OIL HOT
RELIEF TEMP PRESS
JET 6 VALVE IND IND
JET 5 15 10
10 8
TEMP BULB OIL 6
5 T °C PSI P
4
X10
JET 3 0 2
FILLER –5 0

INPUT
QUILL

FILTER UPPER
JET 4 X
M
S
N
FULL MAST
PUMP C
LOW H
CAUTION PANEL I
PUMP SCREEN P
PLNTY
CHIP XMSN
CHIP I
SYSTEMS

DETECTOR N
REVIEW

D
TEMP SUMP
BYPASS
VALVE TO RESET
FILTER ROTATE
RING
60° CW

LEGEND
COOLER OIL SUPPLY

PRESSURE
DRAIN

QUICK DISC.
VALVE

Figure SRE-2. Transmission Oil System Schematic

ROTOR SYSTEMS
MAIN ROTOR
The main rotor system consists of four composite blades mounted to flex-beam
type yokes to provide a soft-in-plane arrangement. Elastomeric bearings help
damp vibrations and provide lead-lag action for the main rotor blades.

TAIL ROTOR
The tail rotor is a two-bladed, semi-rigid rotor system mounted on the right
side of the vertical f in. Rotor flapping is allowed by a delta hinge for stabil-
ity during hovering turns and forward flight.

SRE-8 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

TRANSMISSION
The transmission is mounted in the pylon support structure with four vibra-
tion-isolating mounts. Two stages of planetary reduction gears and spiral
bevel gears are used to reduce the input driveshaft speed to the speeds required
for main rotor and tail rotor drive. Both hydraulic pumps are driven by the
transmission (Figure SRE-2).

A gauge in the instrument panel allows the flight crew to monitor transmis-
sion oil temperature and pressure. Warning lights are provided to warn of high
transmission oil temperature and low transmission oil pressure. A caution light
is provided to warn of metal particles in transmission oil. Three remote trans-
mission chip indicators are located on the right side of the pedestal near the
cabin floor. On some models a fourth chip detector indicator is connected to
a debris monitor which is located in the transmission internal f ilter.

HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS
Two separate hydraulic systems are used to boost cyclic, collective, and anti-
torque flight controls. Each system contains a reservoir, a pump, an integrated
valve and f ilter assembly, an accumulator, and check valves.

SYSTEMS
REVIEW
Each integrated valve and f ilter assembly contains a system pressure f ilter
and a system return f ilter. In the event any one of these f ilters becomes par-
tially clogged, a button on the f ilter housing will pop out to give an indica-
tion of f ilter bypass. This button will also activate a switch which will cause
a remote hydraulic f ilter bypass indicator in the lower right area of the nose
to switch from green to red. The remote bypass indicator can be seen on the
preflight check through the lower right nose window.

An electrical interlock prevents both hydraulic systems from being switched


off at the same time. If one system is off and the second system is switched
off, the second system will remain on.

The hydraulic pumps are driven by the transmission and have different rated
capacities. The system 1 pump delivers a greater volume of fluid to operate
the antitorque flight control servoactuator.

The cyclic and collective flight control servoactuators are each powered by
both hydraulic systems, such that if either system fails, the remaining sys-
tem will operate the actuators. The antitorque servoactuator is powered by
the No. 1 hydraulic system only.

Each hydraulic system has a gauge to allow the flight crew to monitor fluid
pressure and temperature. A HYDRAULIC caution light illuminates in the
event of low hydraulic fluid pressure or high temperature in either system.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY SRE-9


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM


The flight control system consisting of cyclic, collective pitch, and anti-
torque controls, is used to regulate helicopter attitude, altitude, and direction
of flight. The flight controls are hydraulically boosted to reduce pilot effort,
to overcome resistance of the elastomeric bearings in the main rotor system,
and to counteract control feedback forces.

Control inputs from the cyclic stick, collective stick, and antitorque pedals
are transmitted by push-pull tubes and bellcranks to the hydraulic flight con-
trol actuators. The two cyclic flight control actuators are connected to the swash-
plate, located above the transmission. The swashplate converts the f ixed
controls to rotating controls and actuates alternating cyclic pitch inputs to the
main rotor.

The collective flight control actuator is connected to the collective lever at


the mast. The collective lever actuates the collective sleeve, which moves the
mixing/rephasing levers up and down to induce collective pitch to the blades.

The antitorque flight control actuator is located in the aft fuselage compart-
ment near the tailboom attachment. The tail rotor f ixed controls are connected
to the rotating controls through a bearing in the crosshead assembly, which
slides along the tail rotor driveshaft to provide pitch change control.
SYSTEMS
REVIEW

The antitorque control pedals in the cockpit can be adjusted fore and aft
by depressing and rotating a knob located on the floor just forward of each
crew seat.

FORCE TRIM SYSTEM


The cyclic and antitorque controls incorporate a force trim system to provide
artif icial control reaction forces when the controls are manually moved from
their reference positions. The force trim system is also interrelated with the
operation of the AFCS. Refer to Automatic Flight Control System.

The force trim components include spring-loaded force gradient cartridges


connected in parallel with the rotary trim actuators to the fore/aft and lateral
cyclic controls and to the antitorque controls. When engaged, the trim actu-
ators become locked in position by internal magnetic brakes. Manual move-
ment of the controls then actuates the force gradients which provide the
desired control resistance.

SRE-10 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

FORCE TRIM CONTROLS


The force trim system is activated by the FORCE TRIM switch, located on
the pedestal. A FORCE TRIM release button, located on the cyclic stick grip,
can be depressed to de-energize the system momentarily, allowing the pilot
to reposition the cyclic and pedals for long term pitch, roll, and yaw correc-
tions. Upon releasing the button, the magnetic brakes are re-energized and
will lock the trim actuators in the new reference positions existing at the mo-
ment the button is released.

The pilot cyclic control stick is gimbal mounted to provide movement in any
direction. There are two cyclic centering caution lights located on the pilot’s
and copilot’s instrument panel near the MASTER CAUTION light. These lights
will illuminate upon excessive cyclic inputs during ground operations below
normal operating range. Properly positioning the cyclic stick will extinguish
the lights.

PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM
The pitot system consists of an electrically heated pitot tube connected to the
airspeed indicator. A second, independent pitot system is installed when the
optional copilot’s instrument kit is installed.

SYSTEMS
REVIEW
The static system consists of the static ports and the tubing necessary to con-
nect them to the airspeed indicator(s), altimeter(s), and vertical speed indi-
cator(s). Two static ports are located just forward of the crew doors. Two
additional static ports are located on the roof underneath the transmission cowl-
ing.

An alternate static port is located inside the cockpit on the pilot’s in-
strument panel on back of the STATIC SOURCE switch. Under normal
conditions, the switch should be placed in the PRI position. This posi-
tion selects the static ports located forward of the crew doors as well as
the roof mounted static ports. If er ratic readings are seen on the airspeed
indicator, altimeter, and ver tical speed indicators, obstr uction of the
outside static por ts is a possible cause. If this occurs, the STATIC
SOURCE switch should be placed in the ALTN position. This position
selects the alternate static air source (cabin air) and at the same time, shuts
off the outside static air source for the pilot’s side only.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY SRE-11


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

AUXILIARY SYSTEMS
HEATING SYSTEM
The cabin heating system, which includes the windshield defrost system,
uses bleed air from the engine compressor sections as the source of heat. A
mixing valve mixes heated air with outside air to obtain the desired temper-
ature.

When windshield defrost is selected, heated air is diverted from the doorpost
and pedestal heater outlets to the windshield nozzles.

VENTILATING SYSTEM
The ventilating system delivers outside air to nozzles by the instrument panel
and also to the windshield nozzles to defog the windshield and provide fresh
air ventilation. The overhead ventilation system delivers outside air through
overhead nozzles to the crew and passenger compartments.

LIGHTING SYSTEMS
Interior Lighting
SYSTEMS
REVIEW

Two multipurpose cockpit/map lights are mounted overhead in the crew com-
partment. Either the white or red light can be selected and the lights may be
adjusted from spot beam to flood type illumination. These lights may be re-
moved from their mounts for increased utility.

Three dome lights with intensity adjustments are mounted in the passenger
compartment. The dome lights also illuminate either red or white and are con-
trolled by a switch and rheostat located in the overhead console.

Two lights in the baggage compartment are automatically switched on when


the door is opened.

Other interior lighting circuits include the instrument panel lights, instrument
secondary lights, overhead console lights, and pedestal lights all controlled
by rheostats in the overhead console. An approach plate and map light is lo-
cated on each forward crew doorpost.

Four self-illuminating beta lights are mounted over the windows in the pas-
senger/cargo doors to identify the emergency exits.

Exterior Lighting
Exterior lighting circuits include position lights, anticollision lights, a land-
ing light, a searchlight, and utility (step) lights. The landing light and search-
light are controlled by switches on the pilot’s collective stick. The other
exterior lights are controlled by switches in the overhead console.

SRE-12 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Electrically powered windshield wipers are mounted above the windshields.
Selector knobs on the overhead console allow the pilot and copilot to control
the windshield wipers independently.

INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
The intercommunications control panel(s), located on the pedestal, are used
by the flight crew to control the intercom system and the navigation and com-
munication audio signals.

An optional aft intercom system may be installed to enable the flight crew to
communicate with passengers in the aft cabin in response to illumination of
the AFT INT CALL lights on the instrument panel. Passengers may also use
the aft intercom system to communicate with each other, or to monitor other
communication or navigation systems being used by the flight crew. During
IFR operations it is recommended that AFT INT be left off to preclude in-
terference with air traff ic control communications.

ROTOR BRAKE

SYSTEMS
REVIEW
The rotor brake incorporates a hydraulic system which is independent of the
flight control hydraulic systems. The primary components include a master
cylinder located on the forward cabin roof, a brake disc with dual brake cylin-
ders mounted on the transmission, and associated hydraulic tubing. Two
ROTOR BRAKE warning annunciators on the caution panel are activated by
pressure switches to warn the pilot that the brake is not fully released.

Rotor brake application is limited to ground operation after both engines


have been shut down and rotor RPM has decreased to below 40%. The brake
should be released just before the rotor stops to preclude backlash, and the
brake handle should be returned to the full-up detent position. After securing
the main rotor blades, the rotor brake may be locked to stabilize the rotor
during windy conditions.

EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM
A set of heat sensing elements is mounted to the cowling and forward f ire-
wall for each power section. A f ire or overheat condition will cause the FIRE
PULL handle for the affected power section to illuminate.

A smoke detector is mounted at the forward end of the baggage compartment


ceiling. Smoke in the baggage compartment will cause the BAGGAGE FIRE
warning light in the instrument panel to flash intermittently.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY SRE-13


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

ENGINE FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM


Two f ire extinguisher bottles are mounted in the aft fuselage. These bottles
are connected in such a way as to allow either bottle to be discharged onto ei-
ther engine. Pulling the FIRE PULL handle of the affected power section closes
the bypass door in the air management system, closes the fuel shutoff valve,
closes both heater bleed-air valves, and arms both f ire bottles. The f ire ex-
tinguisher selector switch may then be used to discharge the main and reserve
f ire extinguisher bottles individually.

PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS


Two portable f ire extinguishers are mounted in the cabin, one on the cabin
floor to the right of the pilot’s seat, and the other on the doorpost aft of the
copilot’s seat.

FIRST AID KIT


A portable f irst aid kit is attached to the left side of the pedestal by hook and
pile fasteners.
SYSTEMS
REVIEW

EMERGENCY EXITS
Door Jettison
If crew doors will not open, door jettison can be accomplished by pulling the
jettison handles, located on the doorpost forward of each crew door.

Window Jettison
If cabin sliding doors or hinged panels cannot be opened, emergency escape
is possible by pushing on the corners of the windows in the sliding doors to
jettison the windows.

SRE-14 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

OVERTORQUE WARNING SYSTEM


An OVER TRQ warning flag (cat’s eye) is located in the lower left aft avionics
compartment. If mast torque exceeds 108%, the warning flag will be tripped
showing alternating black and white sections.

TRANSMISSION
The transmission is mounted in the pylon support structure with four vibra-
tion-isolating mounts. Two stages of planetary reduction gears and spiral
bevel gears are used to reduce the input driveshaft speed to the speeds required
for main rotor and tail rotor drive. Both hydraulic pumps are driven by the
transmission.

A gauge on the instrument panel allows the flight crew to monitor transmis-
sion oil temperature and pressure. Caution lights are provided to warn of high
transmission oil temperature, low transmission oil pressure, and metal particles
in transmission oil. Three or four remote transmission chip indicators are
located on the right side of the pedestal near the cabin floor (see Figures SRE-
3 and SRE-3A respectively).

SYSTEMS
REVIEW
NO 1 NO 2
BUS BUS

BAT BAT

UPPER
ERASE READ

MAST

EEPROM EEPROM

MAST

2 1 5 7 1

SUMP/OIL
MONITOR
TO RESET
ROTATE RING
60° CW

INDICATION THAT A
CHIP HAS BEEN
DETECTED

INDICATION THAT A
CHIP HAS NOT BEEN
DETECTED

Figure SRE-3. Hourmeter Panel—Three Remote Transmission


Chip Indicators

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY SRE-15


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

NO 1 NO 2
BUS BUS

BAT BAT

UPPER

X
M
MAST
ERASE S
N

C
H
EEPROM I
READ PLNTY P
I
N
2 157 1 D
EEPROM
SYSTEMS

SUMP/OIL
REVIEW

MONITOR

DEBRIS
MONITOR
TO RESET
ROTATE RING
60° CW

INDICATION THAT A INDICATION THAT A


CHIP HAD BEEN CHIP HAD NOT BEEN
DETECTED DETECTED

Figure SRE-3A. Hourmeter Panel—Four Remote Transmission


Chip Indicators

SRE-16 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

POWERPLANT
The powerplant, a Pratt and Whitney PT6T-3D twin turboshaft engine, con-
sists of two identical free-turbine power sections connected to a combin-
ing/reduction gearbox. Each power section has its own lubrication system,
starter/generator, and fuel control. The combining gearbox has a separate lu-
brication system.

Instruments on the panel provide indications of gas producer (N 1 ) rpm, power


turbine (N 2 ) rpm, torque, interturbine temperature, oil temperature, and oil
pressure for each power section, and oil temperature and oil pressure for the
combining gearbox. Caution and warning lights alert the crew of the follow-
ing conditions: low engine N 1 or N 2 rpm, low engine oil pressure, metal par-
ticles in the engine oil, low combining gearbox oil pressure, high combining
gearbox oil temperature, and metal particles in the combining gearbox oil.

The pilot rpm switch is mounted on the collective switchbox. The pilot switch
is a f ive-position momentary-on type switch. The INCR position increases
engine rpm, and the DECR position decreases engine rpm. The INCR/DECR
positions control the governors on both engines simultaneously. Regulated
engine rpm may be adjusted inflight through the operating range of 97 to 101.5
± 0.5% by moving the switch.

SYSTEMS
The rpm +2/-2 (trim) switch increases or decreases engine No. 2 rpm to pro-

REVIEW
vided torque, N 1 , or ITT matching. Engine 2 trim range is 2.0 - 2.5% N 2 . En-
gine 2 governor should be at least 95% minimum trim — minimum beep.

The copilot does not have trim capability. For location of rpm switch, refer
to collective control panel (Figure SRE-4).

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY SRE-17


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

LDG LT SRCH LT

EXT
ON EXT ON
O
F L R
F
OFF RETR STOW RETR
ARMED F
IDLE STOP L
START O
E E A
N N E E T
G G N N
1 2 G G OFF S
1 2 ON
UP
H
O
L R I CLTV/YAW
S TRIM OFF
T DN YAW
DN B T R
L R O R E
INC T I L
R H M
P -2 +2 UP CLTV GO
M
DECR
A D
R OUN
SYSTEMS
REVIEW

PILOT SIDE

CL TV/YAW
TRIM
DN

L R

UP
YAW
INCR
B T
R O RR
P T I E GO
M H ML
DECR
CLTV
AR D
O UN

COPILOT SIDE

Figure SRE-4. Collective Control Panel

SRE-18 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

FUEL SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
The fuel system (Figure SRE-5) has 10 impact resistant fuel cells. Six of the
cells are located below the cabin floor and four are located aft of the cabin
and above the level of the underfloor cells. A system of transfer pumps, in-
terconnects, and standpipes provides a fuel burn sequence (Figure SRE-6) that
maintains the fuel C.G. within the required limits. The upper center and aft
center cells also contain a partial isolation barrier to separate fuel.

Cell Vents
Four fuel cell vents are located on the underside of the fuselage. The two vents
located inside of the doorposts vent the lower forward and mid cells. The two
vents located aft of the fuel compartment vent the lower aft and upper fuel
cells.

During refuel operations, air pressure may force some fuel into the vent lines,
and it is normal for the system to expel up to a pint of fuel under each door-
post.

SYSTEMS
REVIEW
Fuel Transfer and Filling
Each lower fuel cell is joined with its opposite (left and right), and with the
upper cells by an interconnect system. Standpipes in the upper cells control
the fill and burn sequence (Figure SRE-7). Fuel is supplied to the engines from
the main underfloor cells (engine feed cells). Fuel for sequences 1, 3, and 5
is transferred to the engine feed cells by gravity. Burn 2 and 4 fuel is trans-
ferred to the upper forward center cell by a dual transfer (left and right) sys-
tem. Each system consists of an electrically driven transfer pump located in
the forward underfloor cell, an ejector pump in the mid cell, and a combina-
tion flow switch and check valve in the main underfloor cells. The transfer sys-
tem will operate continuously until the burn 4 fuel is depleted, then the
thermistors located in the forward underfloor cells will shut off the transfer
pumps. Fueling through the gravity f iller cap will f ill the cells in the reverse
order of the fuel burn sequence.

A transfer pump in each lower forward tank transfers fuel to the upper for-
ward center tank. This flow provides the motive force for an ejector pump in
the lower mid tanks, which transfers fuel from that tank through the corre-
sponding lower main cell. The transfer pumps shut off automatically after the
lower forward tanks are emptied.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY SRE-19


REVIEW
SYSTEMS

SRE-20
THERMISTOR
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

THERMISTOR

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


LEGEND
FUEL CELLS
FUEL STORAGE SYSTEM COMPONENTS
FUEL QUANTITY PROBES (8)
THERMISTORS (6)

Figure SRE-5. Airframe Fuel Storage System


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

T
FLOOR

1
2 3 5 6
T T
4 T

1 TRANSFER PUMP
2 HIGH PRESSURE/LOW QUANTITY FUEL
3 EJECTOR PUMP

SYSTEMS
4 LOW PRESSURE/HIGH QUANTITY FUEL

REVIEW
5 FLOW SWITCH CHECK VALVE
6 ADDED FUEL LINE FOR FUEL OUT
TO UPPER CENTER CELL
T THERMISTOR

NOTE:
LEFT SIDE SHOWN
RIGHT SIDE OPPOSITE
6

3 4
MAIN CELL

MIDDLE CELL

1 LEGEND
FORWARD CELL TRANSFER PRESSURE
EJECTOR PRESSURE

Figure SRE-6. Underfloor Fuel Cell Components

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY SRE-21


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

13000
T/O CG

135.1 141.4
12000
11,900 LB
BURN 1 T/O FUEL
330.5 GAL
T/O GW 11073 LB 2148 LB
11000
GROSS WEIGHT—LB

BURN 2

10000 BURN 4 BURN 3


BURN 5
BURN 6 LND FUEL
9000 LND GW 8925 LB 0 GAL—0 LB
8800
FORWARD LIMIT AFT LIMIT

8000

7000

LND CG
6400
MINIMUM WEIGHT
130.4
6000
130 132 134 136 138 140 142 144
BURNS 1, 3, AND 5
SYSTEMS
REVIEW

BURN 6

BURN 2

BURN 1

BURN 4 BURN 3

BURN 5

T
FLOOR

BURN 4 BURN 2 BURN 6

T T T

Figure SRE-7. Fuel Burn Sequence

SRE-22 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Engine Feed System


Fuel is supplied to engines by electrically driven boost pumps located in the
main underfloor cells (engine feed cells). Fuel passes through a check valve
and an electrically operated f irewall shutoff valve before entering the engine.
A pressure switch for each pump indicates if fuel boost is inoperative. A fuel
crossfeed valve connects the two engine feed systems for operation with one
boost pump inoperative. The crossfeed valve is opened automatically by a sig-
nal from the pressure switch when crossfeed switch is in NORM position.

Fuel Quantity System


Fuel quantity is measured by four capacitance-type quantity probes located
on each side of the helicopter. The signals from these quantity probes are dis-
played on a dual needle fuel quantity indicator located in the center instru-
ment panel. The four quantity probes on the left side of the helicopter drive
one needle and the right four drive the other needle. A digital display on the
instrument displays the signal from the eight quantity probes. A DIGITS
TEST button is located left of the indicator. When pressed, a properly func-
tioning digital display will return to 888 pounds. A FWD TANK/MID TANK
switch, located left of the DIGITS TEST button, allows the pilot to check lower
forward and mid cell quantities separately. In the event of a fuel transfer mal-
function the FWD TANK/MID TANK switch allows the pilot to determine un-

SYSTEMS
REVIEW
usable fuel remaining in forward and/or mid cells.

Fuel System Controls


Fuel system controls are located on the pedestal mounted engine control
panel. The two transfer pumps and boost pumps are individually controlled
by two-position tank ON/OFF switches. Electrical power for No. 1 engine trans-
fer and boost pump is provided by the No. 1 28 VDC essential bus. Electri-
cal power for No. 2 engine transfer and boost pump is provided by the No. 2
28 VDC emergency bus and No. 2 28 VDC essential bus respectively. Four
valve switches are provided: one for each of the fuel valves, the interconnect
valve, and the crossfeed valve. All are two-position switches except the FUEL
INTCON switch. The normal position of the crossfeed and interconnect
valves is closed, but the interconnect valve has an optional open position. Both
have an override position so the valves may be closed, if necessary, after being
automatically opened. Electrical power for the crossfeed valve is provided by
the 28 VDC essential busses. Electrical power for the interconnect valve is
provided by the 28 VDC emergency buses. If essential bus fails, the valves
will continue to operate. The fuel valves are powered by the 28 VDC emer-
gency buses. Circuitry protection is provided by circuit breakers located on
the overhead circuit breaker panel.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY SRE-23


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

FUEL SYSTEM ELECTRICAL


The electrical portion of the fuel system consists of the quantity indicating
system and the fuel transfer system. The quantity indicating system includes
the fuel low fuel warning system.

The fuel quantity indicating part of the system is identical for each side of
the helicopter, respective to fuel cells. Fuel quantity system components for
each side include four capacitive fuel probes, a section of the fuel quantity
signal conditioner, and one needle of a dual needle indicator. In addition to
these components are the digital display and the FWD/MID TANK switch func-
tion. The digital display, switch function, and probe locations are adequately
described in the mechanical portion of fuel system description.

The signal conditioner modif ies the signal from the probes to provide a sig-
nal the indicator needs to give a quantity reading to the crew.

The low fuel indication that is displayed on a segment of the caution panel.
The low fuel signal is provided by thermistors on the fuel quantity probes in
the outboard upper fuel cells through a part of the signal conditioner. A ther-
mistor changes its signal when fuel no longer covers it. The signal change from
the thermistor causes the signal conditioner to provide a signal to illuminate
the FUEL LOW caution light. Either signal conditioner can provide the sig-
nal to illuminate the single FUEL LOW light. The FUEL LOW caution light
SYSTEMS
REVIEW

signal from either side is inhibited if electrical power to the respective side
is not present. This prevents illumination of the LOW FUEL light due to loss
of power instead of low fuel quantity.

The fuel low function interacts with a fuel interconnect feature. When both
low fuel signals from signal conditioners are present, the fuel interconnect
valve will automatically open between the two engine feed fuel tanks. This
causes the FUEL INTCON caution light to illuminate. The light will extin-
guish when the FUEL INTCON switch is positioned from NORM to OPEN.
The option to open or close the interconnect valve is available should a manual
override be desired from either valve position. When the valve is commanded
to change position by selecting OPEN or OVRD CLOSE, the FUEL INTCON
caution light will illuminate during the time of valve movement. It will ex-
tinguish when valve position matches switch position. A press-to-test feature
is provided to determine if redundant electrical power is available. When the
FUEL XFEED/INTCON switch is positioned to TEST BUS 1, the other power
source (bus 2) is disabled. This results in a test that will illuminate the FUEL
INTCON caution light if bus 1 electrical power is not available. The same re-
sult would be valid when the switch is positioned to TEST BUS 2. A similar
test is simultaneously performed for the fuel crossfeed circuit by use of this
switch.

SRE-24 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

The fuel transfer system are identical for each side of the helicopter. How-
ever, the fuel quantity signal from either signal conditioner that enables the
fuel transfer pumps activates both pumps. This results in operation of both
fuel transfer pumps operating until both forward fuel tanks are empty.

Each side has a FUEL TRANS caution light associated with the fuel transfer
function (Figure SRE-8). This light will illuminate if there is fuel in the re-
spective forward fuel tank and no fuel is being transferred. This condition can
occur if the FUEL TRANS switches are not positioned to ON and fuel is pre-
sent in either forward tank. Another condition for illumination of this cau-
tion light is if fuel is present in the mid tank after fuel transfer is complete
from the forward tank. This is an indication of trapped, unusable fuel in the
mid tank. The last condition for illumination of this caution light is loss of
power to respective fuel quantity signal conditioner and absence of fuel flow
from the respective transfer pump. This would result in an illuminated FUEL
TRANS caution light when the respective fuel quantity indicator is inopera-
tive and fuel transfer from this forward tank is complete. The light will re-
main illuminated under this condition after fuel transfer is complete.

As fuel in each forward underfloor cell is depleted, the stream of fuel through
the flow switch is reduced signif icantly and causes the FUEL TRANS caution
light to start flickering. The flickering light advises the pilot that the respec-
tive forward and mid underfloor cells are empty and the transfer pump is still

SYSTEMS
on. The FUEL TRANS caution light flickers only briefly because the thermistor

REVIEW
switches in the forward cells also detect the absence of fuel. The thermistor
switches disable the flow switch signal that illuminates the respective FUEL
TRANS caution light, causing the light to extinguish. Because of system logic,
the last thermistor to dry turns both transfer pumps off automatically.

Loss of electrical power to a signal conditioner causes loss of fuel quantity


indication for the respective side and a FUEL TRANS caution light that
illuminates and will not extinguish after fuel transfer from tank is complete.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY SRE-25


REVIEW
SYSTEMS

FUEL
TRANS

SRE-26
CLOGGED
EJECTOR PUMP

FAILED TRANSFER
SIGNAL PUMP
CONDITIONER

MAIN CELL
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


MIDDLE CELL

LEGEND
FORWARD CELL BEFORE FUEL TRANSFER
DURING FUEL TRANSFER
AFTER FUEL TRANSFER

Figure SRE-8. Fuel Transfer Caution Light Diagram


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Caution Lights
FUEL TRANS No fuel transfer through indicated system. Probably
inoperative transfer or ejector pump.

FUEL BOOST Loss of engine feed line pressure in indicated system.


Indicates fuel boost pump failure. Crossfeed valve
automatically opens.

FUEL LOW Fuel level in left or right cells at or below 190 pounds.
Interconnect valve will open automatically when fuel
level in opposite side decreases to 190 pounds to
allow fuel in lower cells to equalize.

FUEL FILTER Impending bypass of indicated fuel f ilter resulting


from contamination and clogging is indicated.

FUEL VALVE Normally illuminated during transit operation, and


extinguishes when valve position is same as switch
position. A fault is indicated if it does not extin-
guish.

FUEL XFEED Normally illuminated during transit, and extinguishes


when valve is seated. A fault is indicated if it does

SYSTEMS
REVIEW
not extinguish.

FUEL INTCON Normally illuminated during transit operation, and


extinguishes when valve is seated in closed position
or indicates valve has automatically opened with
switch in NORM position. Placing the switch in the
OPEN position will extinguish the light. A fault is
indicated if light fails to extinguish.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY SRE-27


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DC ELECTRICAL
The primary electrical system is a 28-volt direct current, negative ground system
(Figure SRE-9). Power is supplied by two 30-volt, 200-ampere starter/gen-
erators, one mounted on each engine. The output voltage of each generator
is monitored and regulated by a DC control unit. The DC control units provide
overvoltage and reverse current protection and control paralleled generator
operation so that the two generators share total load requirements within ±20
amperes.

Each generator supplies power to a main DC bus and to two interconnected


nonessential DC buses. Each main DC bus in turn, serves as a feeder for the
two essential DC buses and two emergency buses. Electrical separation
between main buses and between generators is accomplished through the use
of circuit breakers and isolation diodes.

In the event that one generator or engine should fail, both nonessential buses
are automatically dropped, and all essential and emergency DC loads are
supplied by the remaining generator. The nonessential bus switch (NON-
ESNTL BUS) located on the overhead console is available so that the pilot
can manually restore power to the nonessential buses. In the event that the
pilot has manually restored power to the nonessential buses and the second
SYSTEMS
REVIEW

generator fails, both nonessential buses are again automatically dropped.


This arrangement provides automatic DC load shedding for a 30-minute flight
with electrical power supplied by the battery only.

SRE-28 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

DUAL
STARTER AMMETER
DUAL STARTER
AMMETER GEN ENG NO. 1 EXT GEN ENG NO. 2
PWR
RECP

STARTER EXT PWR STARTER


NO. 1 RELAY NO. 2
RELAY RELAY
STARTER STARTER
GEN NO. 1 BAT BUS BAT BUS GEN NO. 2
RELAY NO. 1 RELAY NO. 2 RELAY RELAY
BAT BUS NO. 1
NON ESNTL
BUS 1 RLY BATTERY
EMERG EMERG
NON ESNTL BUS SW NON ESNTL NON ESNTL
BUS SW
BUS SENSOR BUS SENSOR BUS 2 RLY

NON ESNTL DC 1 NON ESNTL DC 2

MAIN ESNTL DC 1 MAIN


DC 1 DC 2

ESNTL DC 2

SYSTEMS
REVIEW
EMERG EMERG
DC 1 DC 2

EMERG BUS EMERG BUS RELAY-


INV NO. 1 SW NO. 1 POWER RLY NO. 2 POWER RLY INV 2 INTLK
INVERTER INVERTER
INV
NO. 1 NO. 2
NO. 2 SW
EMERG
BUS SW
EMERG
BUS SW

FROM
BAT BUS NO. 1

Figure SRE-9. Electrical System

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY SRE-29


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

An emergency load switch is located on the overhead console. In the event of


a dual generator failure, placing the switch in the EMERG LOAD position
sheds essential DC buses (Figure SRE-10) providing approximately 90 min-
utes of flight on battery power only. Placing the switch in the EMERG LOAD
position with one or both generators operating does not have any effect on
the DC power system. It will effect the AC power system.

The emergency DC buses (Figure SRE-11) are energized whenever:

• The emergency load switch is in EMERG LOAD position.

• Either battery switch is ON.

• One or both generators operating.

• Auxiliary power is provided.

The essential DC buses are energized whenever:

• One or both generators are operating.

• A u x i l i a r y p owe r i s p r ov i d e d w i t h n o n e s s e n t i a l b u s s w i t c h
SYSTEMS

(NON ESNTL) in manual position.


REVIEW

• Either battery switch is on with emergency switch in NORMAL


position.

The nonessential DC buses are energized whenever:

• Both generators are operating.

• A u x i l i a r y p owe r i s p r ov i d e d w i t h n o n e s s e n t i a l b u s s w i t c h
(NON ESNTL) in MANUAL position.

• One generator is operating with nonessential bus switch


(NON ESNTL) in MANUAL position.

SRE-30 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

SYSTEM FAILURE INDICATION BUS

Avionics, AFCS, and lighting AFCS 2 inop AFCS, HP 2 off Ess 1


Flight dir inop FD flag Ess 2
NAV 1 radio inop No reception Ess 1
C/P ICS inop None Ess 1
C/P turn/slip inop None Ess 1
C/P pitot heater inop None Ess 1
Pilot inst lights inop No lights Ess 2
Eng inst lights inop No lights Ess 2
Utility light No lights Ess 2
AFCS No. 1 AFCS, AP 1 OFF Ess 2
Force trim FT OFF light Ess 2
Engine/rotor rpm warning control unit ENGINE OUT light inop None Ess 1/2
Rotor rpm warning inop None Ess 2

Engine systems FCU switch inop None Ess 1/2


FCU to AUTO if MANUAL Eng performance Ess 1/2
FCU heater inop None Ess 1/2
Ignition inop None Ess 1/2
Starter inop None Ess 1/2
RPM inc/dec inop None Ess 1
Part sep inop PART SEP OFF light Ess 1/2

Electrical systems Inverter 2 inop INVERTER #2 light Ess 2


DC volts Voltmeter to 0 Ess 1/2

SYSTEMS
REVIEW
Gen reset inop None Ess 1/2
Noness bus inop None Ess 1
Fuel system Fuel boost inop FUEL BOOST light Ess 1/2
Fuel trans 1 inop NO. 1 FUEL TRANS light Ess 1
Fuel XFEED None Ess 1/2

Hydraulic systems Switch inop None Ess 1/2


Temperature gage inop Gage to 0 Ess 1/2
System on if switch off Pressure up Ess 1/2

Misc and kits Windshield wiper inop None Ess 1/2


Hourmeter inop None Ess 1

Figure SRE-10. Essential Bus Distribution

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY SRE-31


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

SYSTEM FAILURE INDICATION BUS

Avionics, AFCS, and lighting VHF 1 COMM inop No xmit or rec Emer 1
Pilot turn/slip inop None Emer 2

Pilot map light inop None Emer 2


Pilot pitot heater inop None Emer 2
Stby att ind no charge None Emer 2

Pilot ICS inop None Emer 2

Searchlight inop None Emer 2

Searchlight control inop None Emer 2

AFCS 26V NO. 1 AFCS, AP1 OFF Emer 2

AFCS 115V NO. 1 AFCS, AP1 OFF Emer 2

Master Caution Caution panel light Emer 1

Pilot ATT SYS AFCS, AP1, ATT flag Emer 2

Electrical Systems Inverter 1 inop None Emer 1

Caution panel Caution panel inop CAUTION PANEL light Emer 2

CAUTION PANEL light inop None Emer 2


Baggage fire detection None Emer 1
SYSTEMS

Engine systems Fire detector inop None Emer 1/2


REVIEW

Fire extinguisher inop None Emer 1/2


ITT compensator inop Gage at 0 Emer 1/2
Engine oil temp inop Gage at 0 Emer 1/2

Idle stop inop None Emer 1

Fuel system Fuel interconnect inop None Emer 1/2

Fuel valve inop FUEL VALVE light Emer 1/2


Fuel trans 2 inop NO. 2 FUEL TRANS light Emer 2
FUEL QTY Gage to 0 Emer 1/2

C box and xmsn C box oil temp inop Gage at 0 Emer 1


Xmsn oil temp inop Gage at 0 Emer 2

Misc and kits Emergency floats inop None Emer 2

Hoist cable cut inop None Emer 2


Passenger step inop None Emer 2
Cargo hook inop HOOK ARMED light off Emer 1

Figure SRE-11. Emergency Bus Distribution

SRE-32 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

The primary DC electrical power distribution system is located in the roof


and nose of the helicopter. The generator control units, contactors, buses, and
feeder protection devices are located beneath the battery, under the lower shelf
in the nose compartment. Other contactors, feeder protection devices, and the
distribution buses are located in the cabin roof. System control switches and
distribution circuit breakers are located in the overhead console.

The battery bus switches through the respective battery bus relays prevent a
ground fault (short) in one main DC bus from disabling both generators.
They also select the generator that charges the battery. During normal
operation, BATTERY BUS 2 switch is ON. However, for a battery start of en-
gine 1, BATTERY BUS 1 switch must be ON. With both generators or gen-
erator 2 operating, BATTERY BUS 1 will automatically switch OFF if
BATTERY BUS 2 switch is ON.

SYSTEMS
REVIEW

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY SRE-33


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

AC ELECTRICAL
The AC electrical system (Figure SRE-12) consists of two 450-va, 115/26.5-
volts, 400-Hz, single-phase, solid-state inverters and associated controls. In-
verter 1 is powered by emergency DC bus 1 and is controlled by INV 1 switch
located on the overhead console. Inverter 2 is powered by emergency DC bus
2 and is controlled by INV 2 switch located on overhead console.

There are four additional components essential to the control and operation
of the AC electrical system: two AC voltage sensor relays, and emergency AC
bus control relay, and emergency AC bus control relay, and an inverter 2
interlock relay.

Each voltage sensor relay monitors the 115-VAC output from the corresponding
inverter and directs the AC voltage to the respective buses of each inverter. If
an inverter fails to maintain 104 to 125-VAC output, the corresponding AC volt-
age sensor relay will transfer the AC load to the remaining inverter.

The emergency AC bus control relay sheds all AC buses, except the 115 and
26.5-VAC emergency buses when the emergency load switch is in the EMERG
LOAD position.

The inverter 2 interlock relay disables inverter 2 while the emergency load
switch is in the EMERG LOAD position.
SYSTEMS
REVIEW

Inverter 1, Inverter 2 and AC voltage sensor relays are located on the lower
nose shelf. The emergency AC bus control relay and inverter 2 interlock relay
are located in the cabin roof aft of the overhead console.

INV 1 PWR and INV 2 PWR circuit breakers protect DC wires providing power
to the respective inverters.

No. 1 INVERTER and No. 2 INVERTER segments in the caution panel pro-
vide indication that the 115-volt portion of the indicated inverter has failed.
Another indication of a failed inverter is the loss of the pressure gages.

Eight circuit breakers in the overhead console protect the AC power distri-
bution system.

SRE-34 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

INVERTER CAUTION CAUTION INVERTER


No. 1 PNL PNL No. 2
26 26 ON

115 115

RELAY– RELAY–
AC VOLT AC VOLT
SNSR 1 SNSR 2
26 VAC
BUS 3
FDR
PLT 115 VAC
EMER BUS 2
FEEDER
115 VAC
2 BUS 3
FDR
PLT 26 VAC
EMER BUS 2
FEEDER
2

RELAY–
INV 1
EMERG BUS

SYSTEMS
REVIEW
115 VAC
BUS 1 FDR 2 RELAY–INV
INTLK
26 VAC
BUS 1 FDR 2
BATTERY
PLT 115 VAC
BUS 2 2
PLT 26 VAC
BUS 2 2

EMERG
BUS
INV No. 2 SW SW

Figure SRE-12. AC Electrical System

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY SRE-35


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM


The flight control system, consisting of cyclic, collective pitch, and antitorque
controls, is used to regulate helicopter attitude, altitude, and direction of
flight. The flight controls are hydraulically boosted to reduce pilot effort, to
overcome resistance of the elastomeric bearings in the main rotor system, and
to counteract control feedback forces.

Control inputs from the cyclic stick, collective stick, and antitorque pedals
are transmitted by push-pull tubes and bellcranks to the hydraulic flight
control actuators. The two cyclic flight control actuators are connected to the
swashplate, located above the transmission. The swashplate converts the
f ixed controls and actuates alternating cyclic pitch inputs to the main rotor.

The collective flight control actuator is connected to the collective lever at


the mast. The collective lever actuates the collective sleeve, which moves the
mixing/rephasing levers up and down to induce collective pitch to the blades.

The antitorque control actuator is located in the aft fuselage compartment near
the tailboom attachment. The tail rotor f ixed controls are connected to the
rotating controls through a bearing in the crosshead assembly, which slides
along the tail rotor mast to provide pitch change control.
SYSTEMS

The antitorque control pedals in the cockpit can be adjusted fore and aft by
REVIEW

depressing and rotating a knob located on the floor just forward of each crew seat.

FORCE TRIM SYSTEM


The cyclic and antitorque controls incorporate a force trim system to provide
artif icial control reaction forces when the controls are manually moved from
their reference positions. The force trim system is also interrelated with the
operation of the AFCS. Refer to Automatic Flight Control System.

The force trim components include spring-loaded force gradient cartridges con-
nected in series with rotary trim actuators to the fore/aft and lateral cyclic con-
trols and to the antitorque controls. When engaged, the trim actuators become
locked in position by internal magnetic brakes. Manual movement of the con-
trols then actuates the force gradients which provide the desired control
resistance.

FORCE TRIM CONTROLS


The force trim system is activated by the FORCE TRIM switch, located on the
pedestal. A FORCE TRIM release button, located on the cyclic stick grip, can
be depressed to de-energize the system momentarily, allowing the pilot to
position the cyclic and pedals for long term pitch, roll and yaw corrections. Upon
releasing button, the magnetic brakes are reenergized and will lock the trim
actuators in the new reference positions existing at the moment the button is
released.

SRE-36 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

YAW TRIM REL switch (Figure SRE-4) (if installed), located on collective,
can be pressed forward to de-energize yaw trim only, allowing pilot to
momentarily position pedals for yaw corrections. Upon releasing switch,
magnetic brakes are reenergized and will lock yaw trim actuators in new
reference positions.

The pilot cyclic control stick is gimbal mounted to provide movement in any
direction. There are two cyclic centering caution lights located on the pilot and
copilot instrument panel near the MASTER CAUTION light. These lights will
illuminate upon excessive cyclic inputs during ground operations below normal
operating range. Properly positioning the cyclic stick will extinguish the lights.

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM (AFCS)


The dual digital automatic flight control system (AFCS) enhances stability
and controllability of the helicopter and reduces pilot workload. The AFCS
consists of two independent autopilot systems, either of which is capable of
helicopter attitude control. Both autopilots are three axes systems, (pitch, roll,
and yaw). Each system incorporates independent gyro references, autopilot
computers, and linear actuators to enable either autopilot to continue func-
tioning in the event that the other fails.

Either autopilot can be operated in SAS or ATT mode, but both must be in

SYSTEMS
REVIEW
the same mode. The stability augmentation system (SAS) mode provides
short term stabilization without sacrificing maneuverability. Aircraft response
to a control input is attitude rate limited to provide smooth, coordinated
movement about pitch, roll, and yaw axes. The attitude retention (ATT) mode
provides automatic (hands off) control of pitch and roll attitudes with short
term stabilization of yaw attitude. Turbulence damping in all three axes is pro-
vided automatically in either SAS or ATT mode.

Operation in ATT mode is intended for flight in instrument meteorological


conditions or whenever the pilot desires fully automatic (hands off) control.
SAS mode should be engaged during ground operation, hover, takeoff, and
any other time the pilot controls the aircraft manually.

Use of the force trim system is optional during operation in SAS mode;
however, the force trim must be on during ATT mode operation.

Automatic trim is provided in ATT mode to maintain the linear actuators close
to their center positions for optimum control authority.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY SRE-37


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

AFCS CONTROLS
AFCS Control Panel
The AFCS control panel, located on the pedestal, controls the engagement of
the subsystems and primary modes of the automatic flight control system. The
pushbutton type switches have placards which illuminate when the respec-
tive subsystem or mode is engaged.

Autopilots 1 and 2 are selected by AP1 and AP2 buttons. The SAS/ATT
button is used to select the desired autopilot mode. When either autopilot is
engaged, ATT mode is automatically engaged. SAS mode may then be selected
by depressing the SAS/ATT button.

The TRIM/FD button selects the autopilot computer (AP 1 or AP 2) to perform


autotrim operation, preflight test procedure, and display AL-300 Air Data Dis-
play error codes. The autopilot computer selected is the active autopilot pro-
viding the above functions and is indicated by a 1 or 2 legend illuminated on
the button. In normal operation, the system automatically selects number 2
on power-up. The TEST button controls engagement of preflight test mode.

Force Trim Switch


SYSTEMS
REVIEW

The pedestal-mounted FORCE TRIM switch controls the activation of the cyclic
and pedal rotary trim actuators. When the FORCE TRIM switch is ON while
operating in SAS mode, the trim actuators become locked in position, pro-
viding artificial control reaction forces when the controls are moved from their
reference positions.

When the FORCE TRIM switch is ON while operating in ATT mode, with both
autopilots engaged, the pitch and roll trim actuators are controlled by the
selected autopilot computer to move the cyclic as required to keep the linear
actuators operating within ±10% of their center positions when both APs are
engaged or ±25% if a single AP is engaged. This autotrim function relieves
the pilot of continuous actuator monitoring.

Force Trim Release Button


The FORCE TRIM release button, located on the cyclic stick grip, is used to
disengage the AFCS momentarily so the pilot can maneuver the controls
manually for large pitch or roll attitude changes.

Upon depressing the FORCE TRIM button, the pitch and roll rotary trim ac-
tuators are de-energized; the pitch, roll, and yaw linear actuators return to their
center positions; and the autopilot computers are placed in a fast synchro-
nization mode to track flight control positions. Upon releasing the FORCE
TRIM button, the autopilots will resume functioning in the preselected mode.
If in ATT mode, the autopilots will maintain the pitch and roll attitudes ex-
isting at the moment the button is released. Upon releasing FORCE TRIM but-
ton, the pilot should release the cyclic stick to prevent interference with
AFCS operation.

SRE-38 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Manually flying in ATT mode without depressing FORCE TRIM button will
result in AFCS counteracting control inputs from the pilot in an effort to main-
tain helicopter at the reference attitude. Although the pilot can override the
AFCS, control response will be sharply reduced.

Attitude Trim Switch


The ATTD TRIM switch, located at the top of the cyclic stick grip, is a four-
position switch used to adjust pitch and roll attitudes when either or both au-
topilots are engaged in ATT mode. Holding the switch changes the pitch
attitude reference 2 degrees/second or the roll attitude reference 3 de-
grees/second.

The ATTD TRIM switch is disabled during operation in SAS mode.

AFCS INDICATORS
Force Trim Caution Light
A force trim caution light (FT OFF), located on the instrument panel below
the pilot’s airspeed indicator, illuminates when force trim system fails or is
switched off. The light alerts the pilot to maintain manual control of the he-

SYSTEMS
REVIEW
licopter, because automatic attitude control is impossible without a properly
operating force trim system.

Actuator Position Indicators


The actuator position indicator (API) panel, located on the pedestal, provides
the pilot with visual indicators for monitoring the positions of the autopilot
pitch, roll, and yaw linear actuators with respect to their centers of travel. AP1
actuator positions are normally displayed when both APs are engaged. AP2
actuator positions may be indicated by depressing and holding SYS 2 button.
If either autopilot should disengage for any reason, the APIs will indicate the
actuator positions of the autopilot which remains engaged.

The APIs will move slightly during operation in SAS or ATT mode. Autotrim
will keep the actuators operating near their center positions when both au-
topilots are engaged in ATT mode.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY SRE-39


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

AL-300 AIR DATA DISPLAY


The Air Data Display (ADD) is used to display error codes during system power-
up test, pre-flight, and continuous operation. If more than one fault exists,
the display will intermittently display each fault code. A brief description of
fault codes is provided in BHT-412-FM-4. Refer to Honeywell SPZ-7600 In-
tegrated Flight Control System Pilot’s Manual for details.

CAUTION PANEL AND ADVISORY LIGHTS


The single AFCS caution panel light on earlier Bell 412s has been replaced
by two new caution panel lights labeled NO. 1 AUTOPILOT and NO. 2 AU-
TOPILOT. Failure of either autopilot will cause its respective caution panel
light to illuminate.

An AUTOTRIM caution panel light has been added. The AUTOPILOT cau-
tion panel light will illuminate any time autotrim is inoperative or has been
disabled.

Two new, four-segment, advisory caution lights have been added to the pilot’s
and copilot’s instrument panels above their respective ADIs or EADIs. The
letters P,R, Y and C, each in their own individual segment of the lights, will
illuminate to indicate an open pitch roll or yaw autotrim detent switch in their
SYSTEMS

respective channel. In the 3-axis DAFCS, only the P and R caution light seg-
REVIEW

ments are active. All four segments are active in the 4-axis DAFCS only (Fig-
ure SRE-13).

The FT OFF and DCPL two-segment caution light, previously mounted on


the pilot’s instrument panel above the flight director mode selector panel, has
been moved to above the pilot’s ADI, and another identical light has been added
above the copilot’s ADI. The FT OFF caution light function remains un-
changed from previous model 412s and will illuminate anytime the FORCE
TRIM switch on the center pedestal is switched OFF. The DCPL caution light
is functional only on those 412s with the flight director option installed.

P R
Y C
Figure SRE-13. Detent Switch Caution Lights

SRE-40 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Tail Rotor (Antitorque) Control Rod Actuator


A second series control rod actuator has been added to the tail rotor mechanical
flight control rod. This second actuator is controlled and activated by AP2.
However, in the 3 Axis DAFCS, the yaw channel still functions as SAS mode
only, regardless of DAFCS operational mode, ATT or SAS, selected.

Added Control Motion Transducers


A second control motion transducer has been added to the tail rotor and col-
lective mechanical flight control systems to provide flight control movement
information to AP2 so that AP2 can properly operate its yaw channel control
rod actuator. The collective control motion transducers are not utilized by the
3-axis DAFCS.

Standard Bell 412 Equipment


The 3-axis DAFCS also requires the standard Bell 412 flight control force trim
system, the force trim release (FTR) switches and the ATTD TRIM switches
mounted on the pilot’s and copilot’s cyclic sticks.

DAFCS Operation

SYSTEMS
REVIEW
Basic 3-axis DAFC operation in the SAS and ATT modes remains unchanged
from previous Bell 412s with the following exceptions:

• If the force trim system is OFF when the APs are switched on, the
DAFCS will come up in SAS mode rather than ATT.

• Turning the force trim switch OFF will disable autotrim and cause the
AUTOTRIM caution panel light and FT OFF instrument panel lights
to illuminate.

• Separate yaw rate gyros provide information to each AP computer for


yaw SAS mode operation.

Figure SRE-14 provides an additional view of 3-axis DAFCS components and


operation.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY SRE-41


REVIEW
SYSTEMS

SRE-42
TO TARSYN-H
THREE AXIS TO COPILOT ATTD DISPLAYS TO PILOT ATTD DISPLAYS
REF NO. 2
TARSYN-H
NO. 1 NO. 2 THREE AXIS
CS-412
REF NO. 2
REMOTE TARSYN-H FD SEL
COMPENSATOR AL-300
THREE AXIS AIR DATA (PC-700)
REF NO. 1 DISPLAY

ACTUATOR POSITION INDICATOR


FX-220 FROM
FX-220 FLUX CS-412
FLUX VALVE
VALVE NO. 2
NO. 1 PC-700 AUTOPILOT CONTROLLER
RG-204A RG-204A
YAW RATE YAW RATE
GYRO NO. 1 GYRO NO. 2
FZ-706 DIGITAL
FLIGHT CONTROL
FZ-706 DIGITAL COMPUTER NO. 2
FLIGHT CONTROL DIGITAL DATA BUS
COMPUTER NO. 1

NO. 1
NO. 2 PITCH
BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

CONTROL POSITION POTENTIOMETERS


FD SEL
(PC-700) FTR ANTI-TORQUE
CYCLIC P1 P2 PEDALS
BEEP
ROLL
PITCH TRIM CYCLIC R1 R2

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


ACTUATOR CONTROL
COLLECTIVE STICK
CONTROL YAW
Y1 Y2
ROLL TRIM STICK
ACTUATOR CONTROL
RODS
C1 C2

Figure SRE-14. 3-Axis DAFCS Schematic


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

VOICE/FLIGHT DATA RECORDER


Voice/flight data recorder system consists of a flight data recorder, cockpit
voice recorder, air data computer, flight data acquisition unit, and impact switch.

Flight data acquisition unit gathers data from air data computer, various in-
struments, and other sensors and transmits data to flight data recorder. Flight
data acquisition unit is DC powered and flight data recorder is AC powered. FDR
SYS FAIL caution light, located on the instrument panel, indicates either flight
data acquisition unit or flight data recorder is inoperative. Each of these units
is protected by an FDR circuit breaker located in nose of helicopter.

Cockpit voice recorder records voice signals from pilot intercom, copilot in-
tercom, and area transmitters. It also records a time signal from flight data
acquisition unit. Cockpit voice recorder tape is 30-minutes long, and will write
over previously recorded information after 30-minutes has expired. Record-
ing will cease if impact switch is tripped. Cockpit voice recorder is DC pow-
ered and is protected by CVR circuit located in nose of helicopter. A functional
test can be perfor med by pressing TEST switch on COCKPIT VOICE
RECORDER control head, located on pedestal, and verifying meter reads
GOOD. Erase switch is deactivated and performs no function.

Both recorders are powered automatically and require no pilot action for op-

SYSTEMS
eration.

REVIEW

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY SRE-43


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

DIGITAL CLOCK
Davtron M800 chronometer replace the previous mechanical 7-Day-type
clocks. These quartz crystal chronometers are conveniently mounted on the
outboard sides of the instrument panel in easy view of the pilot and copilot.
Each clock has a large, high-contrast, liquid crystal display with a two but-
ton control below (Figure SRE-15).

The clocks are normally powered through the helicopter’s 28-VDC electrical
system with lighting controlled through the pilot’s and copilot’s instrument
panel rheostats on the overhead console. When aircraft power is switched off,
the crystal timing reference remains powered by a 1.5-VDC penlight, dry-cell
battery, clipped to the rear of the clock case. The dry cell (size AA) battery
is not recharged by the aircraft electrical system and should be replaced an-
nually to ensure uninterrupted service.

M800
SYSTEMS

CHROMOMETER
REVIEW

GMT LT ET

SELECT CONTROL

DAVTRON

Figure SRE-15. Digital Clock Display

SRE-44 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Digital Clock Control


The clock’s display is activated when power is applied to the helicopter and
displays four digits, two on each side, separated by a flashing colon. The nor-
mal display is hours and minutes.

Immediately below the display are three abbreviations, labeled GMT (Green-
wich Mean Time), LT (Local Time) and ET (Elapsed Time). A dot on the dis-
play will be positioned over the appropriate abbreviation to indicate which
function the clock is displaying. Below the function abbreviations are two press-
type button switches labeled SELECT and CONTROL, which operate as fol-
lows:

• Pressing the SELECT button toggles the display between GMT, LT,
ET and then back to GMT.

• Pressing the CONTROL button activates the start and reset functions
of the Elapsed Time (ET) function.

• Pressing the SELECT and CONTROL buttons simultaneously enters


the set mode for the function (GMT, LT, or ET) selected.

GMT (set mode):

SYSTEMS
REVIEW
• Simultaneously pressing and releasing the SELECT and CONTROL
buttons while GMT is displayed enters the set mode for GMT and the
farthest left digit will start flashing.

• Then, momentarily pressing and releasing the CONTROL button will


increment the flashing digit by one. Once the flashing digit is prop-
erly set, momentarily pressing and releasing the SELECT button f ixes
the value of the flashing digit, selects the next digit to the right and
it starts flashing.

• Repeating the above process until the last (farthest right digit) is set;
a f inal press of the SELECT button exits the GMT set mode and the
colon starts flashing to indicate that GMT is set and running.

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY SRE-45


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

LT (set mode):
• Simultaneously pressing and releasing the SELECT and CONTROL
buttons while LT and the farthest left digit will start flashing.

• Then, momentarily pressing and releasing the CONTROL button will


increment the flashing digit by one. Once the flashing digit is prop-
erly set, momentarily pressing and releasing the SELECT button f ixes
the value of the flashing digit, selects the next digit to the right, and
it starts flashing.

NOTE
Only the two digits to the left of the colon can be set
in LT since the minutes digits were set by the GMT
mode.

• Once the digit to the left of the colon is set, a f inal press of the SE-
LECT buttons exits the LT set mode and the colon starts flashing to
indicate that LT is set and running.

ET Count Up
SYSTEMS
REVIEW

• Momentarily pressing the CONTROL button while ET is displayed


starts the display starts the display counting up by minutes and sec-
onds. When the display reaches 59:59, the display begins counting up
by hours and minutes until the maximum of 99:59 (hours and minutes)
is reached. The display may be reset to 00:00, to again begin count-
ing up by momentarily pressing the CONTROL button.

ET Count Down
• Momentarily pressing the CONTROL and SELECT buttons while ET
is displayed enters the COUNT DOWN set mode. The amount of count
down time is now set in the same manner as the GMT set (above). After
the time is set, momentarily pressing the CONTROL button starts the
count down. When the count down display reaches 00:00, the whole
display starts flashing and the ET display starts counting up again. At
this time, momentarily pressing either the SELECT or CONTROL but-
ton deactivates the flashing display and selects GMT (if SELECT
button pressed) or resets the ET count up (if CONTROL button
pressed).

Test
• To ensure that all segments of the display are functioning correctly,
holding the SELECT button in for at least 3 seconds will cause the
display to indicate 88:88. Releasing the button returns the display to
normal operation.

SRE-46 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

MASTER WARNING
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction .................................................................................. MW-1

ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure Title Page
MW-1 Annunciators ................................................................. MW-8

TABLES
Table Title Page
MW-1 Caution/Warning Annunciators.................................. MW-2
MW-2 Additional Caution/Warning Annunciators.............. MW-6

MASTER WARNING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY MW-i


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

MASTER WARNING SYSTEM


INTRODUCTION
The caution/warning system of the Bell 412 provides the pilot with immedi-
ate notif ication of all major systems malfunctions. The majority of the cau-
tion/warning lights are located on the caution panel. Additional caution/warning
lights are located on the instrument panels, readily visible to both pilots. Two
MASTER CAUTION lights alert the pilot when any of the caution/warning
lights illuminate.

The caution/warning system includes: the caution panel, other caution/warn-


ing lights for associated systems, the two MASTER CAUTION lights, cau-
tion panel system switches, and associated electrical supply systems. Warning
lights pertaining to systems that require the pilot’s immediate attention have
red letters on a black background. Caution lights pertaining to systems that
require other than immediate attention have amber letters on a black back-
ground.

The caution panel is located on the engine instrument panel. The panel con-
tains 54 lights, of which 47 are functional.

MASTER WARNING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY MW-1


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Table MW-1. CAUTION/WARNING ANNUNCIATORS

Caution/Warning Cause for Illumination


Annunciator

AUTOPILOT 1 Loss of electrical power to either


Autopilot, or failed Autopilot unit.
Autopilot 1 or 2 inoperative.
AUTOPILOT 2

AUTO TRIM Pitch, roll or yaw trim inoperative.

Both battery switches/relays in the


BATTERY same position.

BATTERY Battery temperature is above limits.


TEMP

CAUTION Caution panel inoperative.


PANEL

C BOX OIL Combining gear box oil pressure is


PRESSURE below normal.
MASTER WARNING

C BOX OIL Combining gearbox oil temperature


TEMP is above limits.

MW-2 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Table MW-1. CAUTION/WARNING ANNUNCIATORS (CONT)

Caution/Warning Cause for Illumination


Annunciator

42/90 BOX Metal particles in 42° or 90°


CHIP gearbox oil.

C BOX Metal particles in combining


CHIP gearbox oil.

ENGINE Metal particles in engine oil.


CHIP

XMSN Metal particles in transmission oil.


CHIP

Generator has failed, is turned off,


DC or is disconnected from the
GENERATOR electrical system.

DOOR Passenger doors and/ or baggage


LOCK compartment door are not locked.

EXTERNAL External power connector door


POWER is open.
MASTER WARNING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY MW-3


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Table MW-1. CAUTION/WARNING ANNUNCIATORS (CONT)

Caution/Warning Cause for Illumination


Annunciator

NO. 1 FUEL
BOOST Fuel boost pump failure has
NO. 2 FUEL occurred.
BOOST

NO. 1 FUEL
FILTER Fuel filter is partially blocked.
NO. 2 FUEL
FILTER

FUEL Fuel interconnect valve not fully


INTCON closed.

FUEL Fuel level in left or right cells at or


LOW below 190 pounds.

NO. 1 FUEL
TRANS Fuel transfer pump has failed,
flow switch or ejector pump
NO. 2 FUEL malfunctioned.
TRANS
MASTER WARNING

FUEL Fuel valve not properly seated or


VALVE circuit breaker out.

FUEL Fuel crossfeed valve not fully open


XFEED or closed.

MW-4 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Table MW-1. CAUTION/WARNING ANNUNCIATORS (CONT)

Caution/Warning
Cause for Illumination
Annunciator

NO. 1 GEN
OVHT
Generator overheating.
NO. 2 GEN
OVHT

GOV Engine governor in manual mode


MANUAL

HEATER AIR LINE Heater mixing valve has malfunction.

NO. 1
HYDRAULIC Hydraulic pressure is below limits or
temperature is above limits.
NO. 2
HYDRAULIC

NO. 1
INVERTER
Failure of AC power inverter.
NO. 2
INVERTER MASTER WARNING

OIL Engine oil pressure is below limits


PRESSURE

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY MW-5


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Table MW-1. CAUTION/WARNING ANNUNCIATORS (CONT)

Caution/Warning Cause for Illumination


Annunciator

PART SEP Particle separator bypass door closed,


OFF or circuit breaker out.

ROTOR Rotor brake linings not retracted.


BRAKE

XMSN OIL Transmission oil pressure is below limits.


PRESSURE

XMSN OIL Transmission oil temperature is


TEMP above limits.

Table MW-2. ADDITIONAL CAUTION/WARNING ANNUNCIATORS

Caution/Warning Cause for Illumination


Annunciator
Smoke is detected in the baggage
BAGGAGE FIRE compartment.
MASTER WARNING

Cyclic control is not centered when


on the ground and rotor rpm is
below 95%.
CYC CTR

ENG 1 OUT Indicated engine N1 rpm is below


53% ±2%.
ENG 2 OUT

FIRE 1 PULL Fire is detected in the indicated


engine compartment.
FIRE 2 PULL

MW-6 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

Table MW-2. ADDITIONAL CAUTION/WARNING


ANNUNCIATORS (CONT)

Caution/Warning Cause for Illumination


Annunciator
Force trim system is turned off,
FT OFF or the circuit breaker out or failed.

DCPL Flight director decoupled from AFCS,


or failed.
Main rotor rpm is either above 103%
or below 95%. If rotor rpm is low, a
RPM warning signal is also heard in the
pilot’s and copilot’s headsets.

STEP EXTEND Passenger steps are in up position.

MASTER WARNING

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY MW-7


BELL 412EP PILOT TRAINING MANUAL

RESET
OIL PART SEP E TEST E PART SEP OIL
PRESSURE OFF OFF PRESSURE
N PNL BRT N
GOV
ENGINE
CHIP
GOV
MANUAL
G G MANUAL
ENGINE
CHIP

FUEL DC
1 LT DIM 2 DC FUEL
VALVE GENERATOR GENERATOR VALVE

NO. 1 FUEL NO. 2 EFIS NO. 2 FUEL


BOOST FAN BOOST

NO. 1 FUEL NO. 1 AUTO C'BOX OIL XMSN OIL NO. 1 AUTO NO. 2 FUEL
TRANS PILOT PRESSURE PRESSURE PILOT TRANS

BATTERY ROTOR C'BOX OIL XMSN OIL ROTOR BATTERY


TEMP BRAKE TEMP TEMP BRAKE

NO. 1 FUEL NO.1 C'BOX XMSN CAUTION NO. 2 FUEL


FILTER EFIS FAN CHIP CHIP PANEL FILTER

FUEL NO.1 NO. 1 NO. 2 NO. 2 FUEL


LOW INVERTER HYDRAULIC HYDRAULIC INVERTER INTCON

HEATER EXTERNAL 42/90 BOX DOOR FUEL


AIR LINE POWER CHIP LOCK XFEED

FDR SYS CLTV AUTOTRIM


FAIL

Figure MW-1. ANNUNCIATORS


MASTER WARNING

MW-8 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

You might also like